University of California • Berkeley Gift of FRANK S, RICHARDS <^:.<^^L-^L^ /r '/^T-^^^^ef MOORE RAISED HIS GUN TO SHOOT. (See pa^e 150.) Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/fortyyearsamongiOOjonerich i FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. A TRUE YET THRILLING NARRATIVE OF THE AUTHOR'S EXPERIENCES AMONG THE NATIVES. BY DANIEL W. JONES. PUBLISHED AT THE JUVENILE INSTRUCTOR OFFICE, SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH. 1S90. COPYRIGHT APPLIED FOR. PRKP'ACE. 'T^HE Scriptures tell us that the truth should not be ^ spoken at all times. Does this imply that a false- hood should ever be told? I think not, but simpty means that silence is often profitable. In answer to the solicitation of many friends, I have concluded to write something of my personal history and experience in frontier life, especially relating to that por- tion spent among the Indians and Mexicans. In doing this I shall aim to write the plain, simple truth. I have to trust mainly to my memory, never having kept a jour- nal. I have preserved a few letters that will aid me, but the greater part of this history will be given as it comes to my mind, just as it occurred to me at the time, modi- fied or strengthened, as the case may be, by after circum- stances. One rule I shall endeavor to follow — to speak the truth without malice toward anyone. This will doubtless be hard for me to carry through, but I make a record of the desire, that it may be continually before me. If the educated reader should find any mistakes in this book, please do not spend much time or money in VI. PREFACE. pointing them out, as they may be too common. No one has been paid for a literary revision. The Author has used his own language and style. The unlearned will be able to understand the language without the use of a dictionary. The Author. IDNTDEZX. CHAPTER I. Cross the Plains with Volunteers to Engage in War with Mexico — Attacked by Mounted Comanches — Remain in Mexico About Three Years after the War — Indulge in Many of the Wild and Reckless Ways of the People, but Abstain from Strong Drink and the Worst Vices — Acquire a Knowledge of the Spanish Language 17 CHAPTER 11. Learn of the ^'Mormons" — Leave with a Company Bound for Salt Lake Valley with Eight Thousand Sheep — My First " Big Scare " — Surrounded and Threatened by Indians Many Times on the Road — Surrounded by Five Hundred Well- Armed Warriors Demanding the Death of a Man from our Camp, as the Chief's son had Died — Meet with an Accident Which Nearly Resulted in my Death 20 CHAPTER III. My Scrutiny of the Mormons — Employment as an Indian Trader — Acquaintance with ''Winter Mormons "—A Proposition of Theft — Loomas Threatens my Life — My Resolve to Kill him — He Finds his Death at Other Hands 37 CHAPTER IV. My Baptism — Walker, the ''Napoleon of the Desert" — Raids in Lower California — He Tricks the Mexicans — Extinction of the Tribe 40 Vlll INDEX. CHAPTER V. PAGE. Patrick and Glenn Fail — Patrick a Rascal — He Robs Enoch Reece 43 CHAPTER VI. My Visit to Salt Lake City — Introduction to Brigham Young — Ordained a Seventy — Judge Brochus' Speech 45 CHAPTER VII. The City Santa Fe— Traditions Concerning it — The Early Set- tlers — My Desires to Travel — The Slave Trade 47 CHAPTER VIII. Governor Brigham Young Checks the Slave Trade — The Prosecu- tion of Offenders — A Noted Trial — A Cruel Argument to Induce Mormons to Buy Indian Children 51 CHAPTER IX. My Marriage — Peaceful Life Among the Savages — Dr. Bowman Seeks Trouble — He is Killed by the Indians — The "Walker War"— Its Cause— A Thrilling Situation 53 CHAPTER X. My Interview with Brother George A. Smith — My Ill-natured Re- mark — He Wins me by Kindness — His Noble Character — Peace with the Indians 59 CHAPTER XI. President Young Calls for Volunteers to meet the Hand-cart Company — I Join the Party — Names of the Company — One Party of Emigrants Found in a Starving Condition .... 62 CHAPTER XII. Myself and two Companions Sent to Search for Missing Com- panies — We Find Them — Our Cool Reception at One Camp — Apathy Manifested — Terrible Sufferings 65 INDEX. IX CHAPTER XIII. PAGE. Short Rations — Wagons Unloaded of Their Freight and Loaded With Emigrants — Myself and Company Left to Guard the Goods — One Sister's Discouragement 69 CHAPTER XIV. We Kill our Cattle to Keep Them from Wolves — Visit from two Brethren — Letter from President Young — A Mail Company Nearly Perishes 75 CHAPTER XV. Our Food Exhausted — Rawhides Cooked and Eaten — Our Fast- Day — An Unexpected Supper — A Providential Food Supply. 80 CHAPTER XVI. Kindness of Indians in Providing Food — Express from Salt Lake City — Visit from an Indian Chief — Scanty Food Supply . . 86 CHAPTER XVII. My Severe Toil in Getting to Camp — Three Stray Cattle Come to the Fort---The Second Company of the Y. X. Express Passes us — Our Hunt for the Cattle — Two Days' Travel Without Food — Our Safe Return to Camp 96 CHAPTER XVIII. Pulling Sticks — '^ Rawhides Against Corn" — Our Buffalo Hunt — Dissatisfaction at the Food Rations — Permission Given to Eat all that was Wanted — Ben Hampton's Prophecy — Its Fulfillment — A Relief Party Arrives — Tom Williams' Party of Apostates — He demands the Goods Under our Care but does not get Them 102 CHAPTER XIX. Ample Food Supplies Arrive — I go to Salt Lake City — My Re- port to President Young — He Approves it — I am Accused of Stealing — My Vindication 109 INDEX. CHAPTER XX. My Trading Trip — President Young Asks me to Meet some False Charges — Wicked Reports Concerning me — Their Unjust- ness made Manifest — The President's Stern Reproof to my Accusers — An Excellent Recommend 115 CHAPTER XXL The Echo Canyon War — An Invading Foe — Plans for Checking its Progress — Peace Declared — Pardon Granted — The True Cause of the Trouble— I Work at Saddlery— The Unjusti- fiable Killing of Yates — Visit from Indians 124 CHAPTER XXII. The Troops Ordered from Camp Floyd to New Mexico — I am Solicited to Act as Guide — Through the Killing of an Ox I am Charged with being a Traitor to the Church — The Trial — My Acquittal — I Desire to Return Home, but am Forced to Continue as Guide 131 CHAPTER XXIII. Difficulty in Finding the Trail — The Character of our Command- ing Officer — My Discharge as Guide — A Proposition to Kill Stith — Rejected by Moore and Myself — Arrival at Santa Fe — The Confidence of the Quartermaster in me 138 CHAPTER XXIV. Leave Santa Fe for Home — Attacked by Robbers — A Shower of Bullets — A Hard Ride — Incidents of our Journey — A Novel Sign 147 CHAPTER XXV. Martin's Cruel Treatment of us — Baker's Kindness — Our Journey Home — Reception by our Families — Our Claim Against the Government 156 CHAPTER XXVI. Duties at Home — Building the Provo Canyon Road — Indulge in a Row— Move to Salt Lake City— The Black Hawk War — List of the Slain — No Help from the U. S. Troops .... 161 INDEX. XI CHAPTER XXVII. PAGE. I Decide to Visit the Hostile Indians — Tabby's Message — My Ruse to Avoid Being Killed or Driven Away — Tabby's Relenting — The Design to Raid Coalville Frustrated ... 169 CHAPTER XXVIII. My Discharge by the Government Agent — I Prepare, in Mid- Winter, to Again Visit the Indians — Bradley Sessions Ac- companies me — Our Terrible Journey and Sufferings — Recep- tion at the Agency 177 CHAPTER XXIX. I Visit the Indian Camp — Our Big Talk — Some of Their Griev- ances — The Kindness of an Indian in Providing me a Horse. 189 CHAPTER XXX. Another Trip to Uintah Agency — Confidence of the Indians — My Return to Salt Lake City — Call on Secretary Delano — G. W. Dodge Visits the Indians as a Peace Commissioner — Speech of Chief Douglas — Treaty with Grass Valley Indians ... 195 CHAPTER XXXI. Whisky Sold to the Indians — I Forbid the Traffic — Douglas and his Band Demand an Order for Fire-Water — They Threaten to Kill me — My Trick on them for Threatening me — Mr. Dodge Orders the Indians Back to the Reservation — They Refuse to go — Trouble Brewing — Peaceable Settlement . . . 203 CHAPTER XXXII. The Killing of an Indian Near Fairview — His Friends Visit me — I Advise them to keep the Peace and they do so 211 CHAPTER XXXIII. The Salt Lake City Election in 1874 — Deputy Marshals Attempt to Run Things — Mayor Wells' Order — The Mob Dispersed — Captain Burt and his Men Make Some Sore Heads . . . . 214 XU INDEX. CHAPTER XXXIV. PAGE. President Young Requests Brother Brizzee and Myself to Prepare for a Mission to Mexico — Mileton G. Trejo Joins the Church — His Remarkable Conversion — I Report to President Young that I am Ready — One Hundred Pages of the Book of Mor- mon Translated into Spanish and Printed 219 CHAPTER XXXV. The Missionaries for Mexico — We are to Explore the Country — Our Outfit and Mode of Travel — Our Stubborn Mules — Inci- dents of the Journey 233. CHAPTER XXXVI. Our Explorations — Arrival at Phoenix — We Push Forward on our Journey — Camp Among Thieves — A Meeting Held with Indians — Its good Results 240 CHAPTER XXXVII. We Visit the Governor of Arizona — An Indian Country — My Talk with the Natives — The Custom Officer — He Favors our Entry into Mexico 249. CHAPTER XXXVIII. A Priest Warns his Congregation Against Mormons — We Find Some Friends — Our Plans for the Season — Letter from Presi- dent Young — Threats of some Rowdies — The Peaceful Re- sults 256 CHAPTER XXXIX. Justice in Early Days — We Prepare to go Further — Our Letter of Introduction — Loss of our Animals — We Trail and Find Them 266 CHAPTER XL. The Object of our Mission — Our Arrival at Chihuahua — Our Gen- erous Landlord — We Call on the Governor — Interest Aroused Concerning us — Interview With Robbers 273 INDEX. XIU CHAPTER XLI. PAGK. We Decide to Visit Guerero — Meeting at Concepcion — We Pre- pare to Return Home — The Priest at Temosachic — His Kind- ness to us — Testimony of a Stranger 280 CHAPTER XLH. Experience at El Valle — We Travel Through a Dangerous Indian Country — Soldiers on the Move — Visit from an '' Old Timer" 288 CHAPTER XLin. Narrative of our Visitor's Life — His 'Early Studies and Aspirations — His Marriage to a Deceitful Wife — He Flees to California — His Wife Assumes Repentance and he Returns to her — Further Hypocrisy 294 CHAPTER XLIV. We Meet Leading Brethren in Arizona — Arrival Home — Incorrect Reports Concerning me — My Horse ''Tex" — Meeting With President Young — He Accepts our Labors 300 CHAPTER XLV. A Colonizing Mission to Mexico — I Prefer to be Relieved — My Wish Not Granted — The Company Who Volunteered — Our Start From St. George — Parting With President Young . . 304 CHAPTER XLVL We Locate on Salt River — Letter from President Young — We Commence Work on our Ditch — Hire Indians to Help us — My Associations with the Red Men 309 CHAPTER XLVII. Deceit of my Interpreter — Indians Apply for Baptism-^-Some True-Hearted Natives Receive the Ordinance — Help Given on our Ditch by the Pimas and Maricopas — The U. S. Agent Forbids my Interfering with the Indians 315 XIV INDEX. CHAPTER XLVIIl. PAGE. I am Accused of Conniving with the Indians to Steal — My Arrest — Investigation and Discharge — The Fate of Witches Among the Natives — I Interfere to Prevent their Murder — Captain Norval's Threat — His Mistake 325 CHAPTER XLIX. Opposition to the Indians — An Exciting Meeting — A Commis- sion Appointed to Investigate Indian Water Claims — Efforts to Rob the Natives — Armed Men Begin to Gather — Peaceful Settlement 331 CHAPTER L. I Decide to Devote Myself to Personal Interests — Summoned as a Witness in Indian Difficulties — My Own Troubles — I Meet the Demands of my Brethren Though it Takes my Home . . 337 CHAPTER LI. I Remove to Tonto Basin — Death by Accident of my Wife and Child— Return to Salt River— My Official Duties There- Trip to Old Mexico 344 CHAPTER LIL Accidental Shooting of my Son-in-law — My Opinion of Early Colonization by the Saints — I go on an Exploring Trip — I Find the Land Described by President Young — I Endeavor to Make a Purchase but Fail 352 CHAPTER LIII. Other Brethren Visit my Proposed Purchase — Their Good Report — Death of my Son, Wiley — My Return to Salt Lake City — A New Invention 360 CHAPTER LIV. The Apache Indians — Ideas Concerning God — A Statement Con- cerning the Jesuits — Treachery of Kerker — Slaughter of the Apaches — The Navajoes — Colonel Chavez' Horse Race — Loss of Government Horses — War with this Tribe— The Yaqui Tribe — The Tarumaries — A Peculiar Custom . . . 363 INDEX. XV CHAPTER. LV. PAGE. Letter to the Deseret News — A Brief Review of Mexican History — Characteristics of the People — Land Grants and Purchases — Peculiarities of Land Titles — The Climate of Mexico . . 372 porty Year5 f\r[\OT)(^ t\)e li^diaps. CHAPTER I. Cross the Plains with Volunteers to Engage in War with Mexico — Attacked by Mounted Comanches — Remain in Mexico about Three Years after the War — Indulge in many of the Wild and Reckless Ways of the People, but Abstain from Strong Drink and the Worst Vices — Acquire a Knowledge of the Spanish Language. IN THE year 1847, ^ crossed the plains with the volun- teers from St. Louis, Missouri, going out to take part in the war with Mexico. At that time the Com- anche Indians were a power on the plains. The Battal- ion I belonged to was attacked while in camp on the Arkansas River. On the opposite side of the river were sand hills. Wood was very scarce in the region and on arriving in camp, it was customary for a number of the most active young men to go out in search of fuel, gen- erally "buffalo chips." On looking across the river there was seen a few small piles of what looked like driftwood. This had been placed there by the Indians as a decoy ; but no suspicion was felt at the time, as we had heretofore seen no Indians, neither was there anyone along who understood the In- dians' "tricks." Some thirty men started in haste for this wood. Only one man taking his gun, one other had a small pocket pistol. A few of the most active men secured the wood piled up, whilst the others remained gathering 1 8 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. the scattered sticks and picking berries that grew among the sand-hills. Suddenly there charged upon them about twenty-five mounted Comanches. Using their long, sharp spears they would ride a man down, spear him through, catch him by the hair, and scalp him without dismounting. They killed and scalped eight men, wounding and scalping another that recovered. Al- though there was a battalion of infantry and a company of cavalry in camp, this was done before help could reach the men. The men in camp rushed across the river, firing at the Indians, who retreated as soon as they were in danger. The cavalry company mounted and pursued for some time but could not overtake the Indians. This was my first introduction to Indians. After this we were more watchful. Many attacks were made and men killed in those days in open day- light in what might be termed a fair field fight, while others were surprised, and sometimes whole parties murdered, as was the mail company at Wagon Mound in 1849. Some of them were personal friends of mine. At that time, in common with white men generally, I looked upon all Indians as fit only to be killed. After the war was over, I remained in Mexico until July, 1850. Of my stay in that country for some three years, I will give only a brief sketch and write that which has a bearing on my future life and actions, as will be given in this work. There are many things that have occurred in my experience which might be interesting to some but not to the general reader. I will say this, and say it truly, I took part in many ways in the wild, reckless life that was common in that land, so much so that I often felt condemned, and longed for something to call me away from where I was, and lead me from the evils I was surrounded by. I had FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 1 9 much pride, always believing myself better than many others. This caused me to preserve myself from de- gradation. There was a feeling continually with me, that if I would keep my body pure and healthy, I would yet find a condition in life that would be satisfactory to me. This spirit enabled me to abstain from strong drink and other worse vices that I could see were destroying the lives of my associates. Notwithstanding this, I found enough to practice in the way of gambling, swearing, fighting, and other rough conduct to feel heartily con- demned in my own conscience. While in Mexico I formed a kindly feeling toward many of the Mexican people, studied the Spanish lan- guage, so as to read and write it and act as interpreter. My mind often reverts to those days. I had been left an orphan at eleven years of age. I then left all my friends and relatives and went out into the world alone, probably as willful a boy as ever lived. No one could control me by any other means than kindness, and this I did not often meet with. The result was, I found myself among rough people in a wild country among those who knew no law but the knife and pistol. The old Texas Rangers and many of the Missouri planters being the leading characters. I often wonder how I got through, and I can only account for it in one way : I did not like this way of liv- ing. I felt condemned, and often asked God in all earn- estness to help me to see what was right, and how to serve Him ; telling Him I wanted to know positively, and not be deceived. I felt that the people of this age ought to have prophets to guide them, the same as of old, and that it was not a "square thing" to leave them without anything but the Bible, for that could not be sufficient or 20 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. the people would not dispute so much over it. These feelings grew upon me, and I began to be more careful of my conduct, and felt a greater desire to leave the country. CHAPTER 11. Learn of the "Mormons" — Leave with a Company bound for Salt Lake Valley with Eight Thousand Sheep — My First " Big Scare" — Surrounded and Threatened by Indians Many Times on the Road — Surrounded by Five Hundred well-armed Warriors De- manding the Death of a Man from our Camp, as the Chiefs son had Died — Meet with an Accident which nearly Resulted in my Death. IN THE summer of 1850, quite a large company fitted up at Santa Fe, New Mexico, to go to California by the old Spanish trail, leading to Salt Lake ; thence by the northern route to Upper California. I had heard some strange stories about the Mormons, such as were common at that time. I heard of the Mormon Battalion and Pioneer move to Great Salt Lake, a country then only known as the "Great Desert of America," that the Mormons had moved into the desert away from every- one, etc. My sympathy was drawn toward them, for I had often felt as though I wanted to find something dif- ferent from anything yet seen. So when I heard of this company being made up to go through the Salt Lake country, I determined to make the trip with them. At that time the Ute nation was very powerful, possessing the country from near the settlements of New FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 21 Mexico clear to Utah Valley. They were known as a proud, haughty people, demanding tribute from all who passed through their country, even in times of peace. The party fitting up were taking through some eight thousand head of sheep. The old mountaineers prophe- sied that we would never get through the Ute country with so much to tempt the Indians. However the owners concluded to risk the venture, as mutton was very high at the mines in California. We left the settlements of New Mexico at Abiquin, the trail soon entering the wild mountain country, which was at that time only known to a few venturesome traders, and to Mexicans. Very few white men had ever been through the country. At the time of our trip the Utes were supposed to be at peace ; but peace in those days meant that if they could rob without killing you, all well ; but if necessary to do a little killing without scalping they considered themselves quite friendly. Scalping means hating. Often, when remonstrating with Indians for kill- ing people, they would say they did not scalp them. On enquiring what this meant, I finally learned that the Indians believed that in the spirit world friends recog- nized each other by the hair, and when they were scalped did not know one another. This accounts for the great risk they will run to remove those killed in battle to prevent their falling into the hands of the enemy. Nothing exciting occurred for several days after leav- ing the settlements. Our first meeting with Indians was on the Rio Piedras, a day's travel beyond the crossing of the Rio San Juan. Here I got my first scare. The river bottom was spotted with cottonwood trees and willow groves. On arriving in camp, a small party of us unsaddled and started to the river to take a bath. 2 2 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. passing through several yards of willows before getting to the river, While enjoying ourselves bathing, we heard a volley of rifle shots from the direction of camp. The shots continued to rattle for some time ; then a stray shot occasionally finishing off just as a battle with Indians naturally would. We were out of the water and dressed in short order, fully believing that our camp had been attacked and probably all killed. We rushed for the brush to hide. I got separated from the rest, hid myself and laid quiet reflecting upon my situation. My only chance for life seemed to be to keep hid until night, then try and get on the trail and travel back to the settlements, over one hundred miles distant. This I fully expected to try and hoped to accomplish. Finally I gained courage enough to creep to the edge of the willows toward camp to see if I could dis- cover what had become of the camp. In and around where we had unsaddled, I saw a great lot of savage looking Indians on horseback ; some were still, others moving about. I dodged down now fully convinced that all our company was killed. I lay for a few moments in terrible fear. When I looked out again, taking a careful survey of camp I discerned one of our company hanging a camp-kettle over a fire. Soon I saw some others engaged in camp work. I now concluded that the Indians had spared a few and put them to cooking, so I decided to surrender as a prisoner. When I approached near camp I saw most of the company attending to their own affairs as usual. I concluded to say nothing about my scare and walked in quite unconcernedly; asked what they had been firing at, when I was told that just as the Indians came into camp a band of deer had run by. Both Indians and whites had been firing at, and had killed several deer. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 23 The Indians were perfectly friendly, and all hands were making ready to enjoy a feast of fat venison. I kept silent; no one but myself knew how I suffered during my first ''big scare." I never questioned my companions about our mutual fright neither did they ever make any reference to the affair, why I do not know unless they, like myself, were afraid of being laughed at. We were surrounded and threatened by the Indians many times on the road; but through the influence of our guide and interpreter, we were allowed to pass along on easy terms. We had for guide Thomas Chacon, a Mexican Indian, the same who will be remembered by many of the Mormon Battalion, as he traveled in com- pany with them as assistant guide, and returned and wintered at the old fort in Salt Lake in 1847-48. Once at the bend of the Dolores river our chances for life seemed very slim. We were surrounded by over five hundred warriors, well armed. We numbered about fifty men, mostly Americans. The chief had sent a dep- utation to our camp on the Mancos river, the day before, stating that his son had died, and that either an Amer- ican or Mexican would be demanded from our camp for a sacrifice, and if not given up peaceably, war would be opened upon us, and all would be killed. This de- mand was made by the old Elk Mountain chief. Our interpreter, who had lived many years among these Indians, felt quite uneasy, telling us of the power of this chief and his tribe. He did not advise us to give up a man, but probably would not have objected, as he knew we could not spare him, he being the only one who knew the trail. Captain Angley, who had charge of this com- pany, looked upon the threat as an insult, and told the Indians to say to their chief that he had no men to vol- 24 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. untarlly give up, but plenty to fight ; if he wanted any to kill he would have to fight for them. We were a half day's march from the great chief's camp, and I will admit that I was frightened, for I was much under the influence of the old guide, being con- versant with his language. I was in the habit of riding along with him and listening to his talk about the Indians; he often told me how he succeeded in making peace with them. Previous to this time we had had several ** close calls," but Old Thomas seemed to always have some way to talk the Indians into peace. This time he appeared uneasy and fearful. On arriving at the Big Bend of the Dolores, we took the best position possible for defence, where there was some fallen timber. Soon the Indians commenced crossing the river above us on horseback and fully prepared for battle. There were about fifty of them, all well armed and mounted. They took position some two hundred yards from camp in a hne facing us, and there stood. I was keen to com- mence firing upon them, thinking if we got in the first shot we would be more likely to conquer and several of the company felt the same ; but when we tried to urge this upon the captain and Old Thomas — for nothing was done without the guide's consent when Indians were in the question — the old man smiled and said, ''Wait, friend, there ain't enough yet to shoot at ; you might miss 'em." By this time we had learned that the old guide's wisdom and policy had saved us, when if a shot had been fired we would doubtless have been destroyed. It was not long until we understood his meaning ; we saw others coming in tens and twenties and doing as the first had done till they formed a half-circle around us. We were near the bank of the river, our rear being FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 25 somewhat protected by the bank and width of the stream. (In those days nothing but old fashioned Ken- tucky rifles were in use.) Others followed till they were several files deep. There were not less than five hun- dred, and all had their arms ready in a threatening atti- tude. After approaching to within some fifty yards of camp, where we had got behind logs and piled up our packs in the best way possible for defense. The chief, with a few others, rode a little forward and in a loud voice made known his wants, showing us his warriors with arms ready, demanding that we at once should sub- mit. This was interpreted to the captain by the guide. The captain and most of the company understood Span- ish. I thought surely our day had come, and so did many others, but all felt they would rather die fighting than to cowardly submit to such an arrogant and unrea- sonable demand. The captain requested the chief to approach nearer, saying that he did not wish any trouble and desired to pass through the country in peace, and was willing to respect all his rights. At this the chief approached and finally, by much persuasion, he got off his horse, followed by a few others, the main body keeping their places in stolid silence. The captain carefully passed the word so that it went through camp, that if shooting had to be done, he would "open the ball." He did not expect them to attack us in our present position, but if peace could not be made he intended to shoot the chief down. It was about two o'clock when this commenced. The par- ley continued until near sundown before peace was decided upon, but it was finally concluded after agreeing to let the chief have some beads, paints, tobacco, etc., articles we had for the purpose of making treaties. In those days, before the white men taught them to lie and 26 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. betray, the word of an Indian was sacred. Not so now. The moment the captain spoke telling us all was right, there was a general hand-shaking, and what time was left before night was spent in trading and no uneasi- ness was felt by any of the company, for all had perfect confidence in the word of the Indians ; neither were we deceived. During the parley, when the Indians found they could not obtain a man, the next thing they wanted was flour. They were told we had none to spare, but would give them such presents as have already been mentioned. They persisted in wanting flour. We were getting short and so could not spare any. While the debate was going on an Indian went and got his blanket full of good dried meat, rode up near the captain, who was sitting down, and threw the meat on to him, saying, "You poor, hungry dog, if you have nothing for us we can give you something." The captain took it coolly and thanked him for it. When they found they could get nothing more they accepted the presents offered. Some may ask, "What of all this? There was no one killed ; nothing of a blood and thunder character to admire." I will say to such: Just stop reading this book, for it is not of the blood and thunder style, such are written by authors who have never seen what they write about. I am simply telling that which I have seen, known of and taken part in. I cannot help whether it pleases or not. I can only tell it as it occurred, or appeared to me at the time ; neither do I make any allowance for lack of memory. Anything that was not impressed suf- ficiently upon my mind at the time of its occurrence so as to remember the same, I consider not worth relating. I have had some close calls in my life ; but those FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 27 just related occupied my attention about as closely for a short time as anything that ever occurred. A few days after this, just before reaching Grand river, we came very near opening fire on another party of Indians. About half of the company went ahead daily as a front guard, and just as we were emerging from a cedar grove the guide cried out: "Now we have to fight, sure ; there comes a war party full drive for fight." Sure enough. There they came, some five or six hundred yards away, out of a ravine on to a rise of ground some three hundred yards distant. We dodged back into the cedars, every man taking his tree. The Indians cautiously approached to within one hundred yards, there being a few scattering cedars in their direc- tion. The guide took them for Navajoes ; he was afraid of them, but friendly with the Utes. As the Indians were fully in earnest and seeking to get an advantage, we were about to commence firing to try and pick some of them off or keep them back until the rest of our com- pany could come up. Just at this critical moment one of our men said, 'Tf there is one who will follow me I will go out and make friendly signs. May be they are friends." I felt afraid, but being a boy I wanted to appear brave, so I told him I would go ; we went out to an opening with our guns ready for use. As soon as the Indians saw us they called out "Friends?" and came toward us making friendly signs. We told them if they were friends to stop until Thomas could come. The old fellow was so sure they were hostile Navajoes that he had got as far away as convenient, but seeing they had not fired on us he picked up courage and came to where we stood facing the Indians with our guns aimed at them. Mine was cocked, and I can well remember placing my finger on the trigger 28 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. several times with dead aim at the one I supposed to be the chief. As soon as Old Thomas showed himself there was a big laugh all around at the mistake, they having mistaken us for Navajoes the same as we did them. They were on the war path hunting Navajoes who had just made a heavy raid upon them. Soon all was well, as these Indians were Utes and friendly with the guide, he having lived with this same band several years. These were the same Indians who afterwards broke up the Grand Valley or Elk Mountain settlement. During the excitement, after the Indians were recognized, an acci- dental shot was fired, wounding a man by the name of Tattersall severely in the leg. This came near starting a fight, as many thought it came from the Indians. I am satisfied that much blood has been shed, and many cruel wars brought on by some little act that might have been avoided. Here are two cases within a few days that seemed certain fight, and to fight meant certain death ; for in those days the Indians were ten to one of us on the ground, and plenty more to come. I now come to the place where my whole feelings changed toward the Indians, and as the accident that I am about to mention seemingly had an effect on my future life, I will beg leave to write freely. From this time dates my friendship for the red man, which many think so strange. Until this time I had felt about the same as my associates did toward the natives, possibly I was not so bitter as many. There seems to be something providen- tial in my experience so far in never having had to fight with them. I had never been required to shed their blood, and I now made up my mind I never would, if- it could possibly be avoided. About the middle of August, 1850," we were camped on Green river, not far from where the Denver & Rio FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 29 Grand Railway now crosses It. I shot myself acciden- tally ; the wound was one of the most dangerous possible, not to prove fatal. When I found where the ball had entered my clothing, I took out the other pistol from the holster with the intention of "finishing the job." The ball had struck the waist button of my pants as I was standing by the side of my mule. I was placing the pistol in the holster, after saddling up, when the hammer caught on the edge of the holster, pulling it back slightly, when it slipped and went off The ball ranged downward, entering the groin and thigh, passing through some four- teen inches of flesh. Some good spirit told me to hold on, that I would live. Almost every one in the company expressed the belief that I would die. We were about to cross the river, which was up to its highest mark. We had to cross on rafts made of half decayed cottonwood logs which made it very dangerous. I suffered terribly during the day, once having the lock- jaw. I could hear remarks being made that I was dying. When I rallied enough to speak, the first use I made of my tongue was to give all a good cursing, telling them I would live longer than any such a set who were so willing to give fne up. I felt at the time that I would try and live just for spite, for I fully realized I was looked upon as an incumbrance. They could not see how they were to take care of me, as we were traveling with pack animals. I was left most of the day entirely alone, all hands being occupied in rafting over the provisions and baggage. I lay in the shade of a cottonwood tree, think- ing that my companions wanted me to die, so as to get rid of bothering with me. I was some distance from them, and every half-hour I would give a yell just to let them know that I was not dead. Before night I was placed on a raft and floated over to camp. There had 30 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. been much delay in crossing, and it was found that at this rate it would take three days to get over. This gave some hope that I would have time to die decently, and the company would have no further trouble with me only to care for me while I remained. Old Thomas was kind to me and felt as though I might live if I had a little attention. There was a camp of Indians of Tabby's band not far from us. My old friend, the guide, went and told the Indians about me, saying I was his boy, an expression that means a great deal among the Indians, meaning that I was the same as a son to him in friendship. The Indians came, both men and women, and I can never forget their expression of sympathy, or their looks of kindness. They offered to take me and try to cure me. This seemed to stir up the feelings of some of my com- panions, and they began to discuss the possibility of taking me along. Finally, a few of the kindest hearted determined to try it ; so a rig was gotten up, and Old Thomas advised me to endeavor to get to the Mormon settlements, telling me about their goodness, and that if I could reach them, they would care for me. I felt almost disappointed not to go with the Indians, for my heart was melted toward them, and I felt as though I could always be their friend and trust them, and I can truly say that this feeling has ever remained with me. I felt to be guided by the old man, for his judgment was generally good, and I knew him to be a true friend. His description of the Mormons seemed strange to me, and I told him they were a bad people, who had been driven out from the States because they were thieves and murderers, and that for their bad conduct they were banished from decent people. His reply astonished me. He asked, ''How can you say that? There is not one FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 3 1 word true. I traveled with the Mormon soldiers from Santa Fe to Cailfornia ; they never stole anything from the settlements like the other soldiers did. The Mor- mons are honest and have no bad habits like other people. I came back with some of them to Salt Lake and remained there last winter. I traded with the Indians and Mor- mons, and lived with them. The Mormons have no harlots or bad people among them, and all those stories are lies; why do you speak so about them?" The old fellow seemed terribly offended at my words. I felt there was something wrong. I told him I knew nothing about the Mormons, that I had only told him what others said. He replied, "Then wait and see for yourself; they are the best people you ever saw." This caused me to re- flect and wonder why such stories were told of the Mor- mons, for I not only had confidence in the old guide's truthfulness, but I believed he had been with the people enough to know them. A frame was made and placed upon the back of a good stout mule, the foundation being a Mexican Ap- parejo. I had to sit entirely above the mule, as the wound would not allow to sit in a saddle. This made the load top-heavy. The trail from Green river down Spanish Fork canyon, was quite rough and steep in many places. Guy ropes were rigged, and three men took care of me, and I must say that after taking the labor in hand to bring me in, all hands became inter- ested and I was treated with great kindness. I suffered a great deal during the fifteen days I thus journeyed, but I never lost courage. Our drives were short ; sometimes being two days in a camp engaged in cutting roads through the brush for the sheep to pass. This gave me a chance to rest. I attended to my wound myself, as I could not bear anyone else to touch it ; nei- 32 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. ther would I take any one's advice about dressing it. I felt like being my own doctor. I have always believed that if I had been in a good hospital, I would have been ''done for," as the wound was terrible. I starved myself almost to death — an idea obtained from two men's ex- perience in southern Arizona. These two men, Green Marshall and Robert Ward, left Santa Fe with a party going to California by the Southern Trail. Close by where Silver City now is, the party was attacked, as sup- posed, by Apache Indians ; all were left for dead. The surprise occurred early in the morning. About noon Marshall and Ward recovered consciousness. They were stripped and both wounded in several places and almost perishing for water, they being in a dry camp. They started for water and after going a short distance they separated, each in time finding water, but they never met until reaching settlements. According to the account given by each of them, on arriving at the Mexican settlements, they were out some twelve days with scarcely anything to eat, each one supposing the other dead ; and it was several days before they heard of each other, having come into settlements that were some distance apart. The wounds of each had seemingly dried up and healed for the want of some- thing to feed on. I was well acquainted with both men, one being a relative. I took much interest in their case, as it was one of the worst on record. I felt like trying as much as possible the same regime, and believe to this day, in case of severe wounds, that the system should be reduced by abstinence to the lowest possible living condition. Nature so directs many of the lower animal creation. I have known some domestic animals, as well as wild ones, that on being dangerously wounded would hide FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 33 Up for days without food or drink and come out well in time. Finally on the 6th of September, 1850, we came in sight of a settlement, then a fort on the Provo river. This surprised us considerably for we had not expected to meet anyone before reaching Salt Lake City. I shall never forget the peculiar feelings that came over me when we arrived at the fort. The little party with me had become separated from the main company while coming down Spanish Fork Canyon, and we were considerably behind when we saw signs of settlements. We felt somewhat uneasy for fear "the bad Mormons" would take advantage of us and rob^us, as we had some money. When the company of fifty were all together we felt as though we could stand the Mormons off, but the four of us counting myself, I wounded and weak, feared we might be taken in. I had my pistols by me and told the boys I would do my best, if molested. When we got to the fort instead of trouble we found the people with about the same kindly look of the eye and expression of sympathy as was manifested by the Indians on Green river. There are many now living in Provo who remember the circumstance, and how I looked, a mere skeleton sitting on the top of a mule. The Indians also remember me to this day from these circumstances, and call me " Chacon's boy." I now felt conquered as far as Mormon goodness was con- cerned for many offered me help if needed. I was at first tempted to accept their kind offers, but a spirit of pride came over me. It seemed humiliating to receive a favor under any circumstances, so I went into camp with the rest. I was now out of danger ; my wound having done well, but the position in which I had to ride had set the muscles so that crawling on hands 34 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. and knees was my only means of moving about ; still I had not lost my spirits. I had started to California to get rich and did not want to fail. The Mormons often visited our camp, selling us butter, vegetables, and such supplies as they had to spare. Owing to the conflicting stories I had heard about them, I watched them very closely. Some of our company were Missouri mobocrats, who told hard stories about the Mormons. These they related to me as though they were their own personal experiences with them. Some of these men I had known for years and looked upon them as men of truth and honor. How then could I help believing their stories ? And yet, how could I believe people to be such monsters of iniquity as the Mormons must have been if these stories were true? When looking at their friendly eyes and hearing their voices of sympathy, I could see nothing that indicated depravity, but on the contrary, all seemed industrious, kind, honest and peaceable, ever ready to do us a favor or give any wanted information frankly, without any show of craftiness whatever. To this day it is a mystery to me how anyone can call the Mormon people crafty and dishonest. That individuals among us may be, is too true ; but as a people we have a right to be judged collectively, let each person answer for himself. I was sorely perplexed, but each day induced a more friendly feeling toward the Mormons. As yet I had never heard a word of their doctrine, or history, not even having heard of Joseph Smith's martyrdom. In fact, I knew nothing about them. One of our company, who boasted of his cruel ex- ploits in Missouri, went up to the fort and under the guise of friendship procured a book of Doctrine and Covenants from a Sister Higbee, to read and make FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 35 Sport of. There were a number listening and ridi- culing the book. I was some distance away, lying alone in the shade. I thought I might enjoy the fun with the rest and crawled up nearer. When I got within hearing distance something was being read about .God revealing Himself, telling certain ones what to do. This had a peculiar effect on my mind. My oft-repeated prayer asking for this very thing came to my mind. I had heard but very little of their reading, for just as I came within hearing distance some one took the book from the mobocrat and read the account of Joseph and Hyrum's martyrdom. On hearing this I believe I felt just as the Saints did when they first heard of the murder of the prophets at Carthage. The feeling that came upon me at that time was that they were men of God and were murdered by wicked men just as it was there recorded. At once the desire came over me to get away from those who were exulting over their death, and deriding the revelations that I thought might be true. So I determined to stop and see who the Mormons were. I asked the first teamster that passed to take me to the fort, about two miles distant, as I wished to see if I could find some one to take care of me. After being helped on the wagon, the owner, Thomas Ross, asked me a few questions then remarked, " You had better remain in Utah, my son, and you will soon be a Mormon." This seemed strange to me, for according to my idea he might as well have said, "You will be a China- man." I asked how that could possibly be? He replied, " By obedience to the gospel and bap- tism." I asked if the Mormons had a religion. 36 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. He said, ''Yes, the same that Christ taught ; we beHeve in the New Testament." I repHed, "That is what I believe ; but I beHeve it as it reads." ''Well," said he, " that is what we think ; I guess you'll be a Mormon yet." This was something new to me and I was continually asking myself: How can I be a Mormon? On arriving at the fort, I went to Bishop Isaac Higbee's house where I was kindly received, his wife agreeing to care for me on reasonable terms. She is now living in Salt Lake City and has ever been a friend to me. I went back to camp and bade good-bye to my old friends and associates, determined that I would stay and see for myself, and if Mormonism was what they said it was, I would go no further for all the gold in California. Since I was ten years old I had believed there was something before me worth living for and that God would eventually answer my prayers and let me know how to serve Him. I often wonder why I am not more faithful, and if I will ever learn to do as I should. Much of my life seems to have been governed by circumstances over which I have had but little control. That is, I have been impelled by influences that urged me on to certain labors, especially among the Indians, which I have felt compelled to answer. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 37 CHAPTER III. My Scrutiny of the Mormons — Employment as an Indian Trader — Acquaintance with ^'Winter Mormons" — A Proposition of Theft — Loomas Threatens my Life — My Resolve to Kill him — He Finds his Death at Other Hands. AFTER settling myself with the Bishop's family, I soon got so that I could hobble around a little. Everyone was kind and treated me with great confidence. I listened to the elders preaching and soon concluded they were honest and knew it, or were willful liars and deceivers. I was determined, if possible, not to be fooled, therefore I commenced to watch very closely. I soon found that the people took an interest in the Indians, and although they had been at war and the Bishop's son had been killed by them, there was no general feeling of bitterness. The Indians were around the fort more or less, and the people were desirous of friendship. After I had been there a few weeks recruiting, Messrs. Patrick and Glenn came to Provo ; they were traders on their way south to barter with the Indians and whites. They knew nothing about trading with the Indians, something I had learned considerable about from Old Thomas, who had traded with them during our trip. I had also dealt with them while in New Mexico. This firm offered me employment for the winter, to go to San- pete valley, then the head quarters for trading with the Ute Indians. This suited me, for I wished to become better acquainted with the Indians and gain their friend- ship, also to learn their language. Some of them could speak more or less Spanish, but not enough to converse satisfactorily. While in Manti, during the winter, I 2,S FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. boarded with Father Isaac Morley. During the winter I made the acquaintance of Dimick B. Huntington. He told me about the iBook of Mormon, its relationship to the Indians, etc. It seemed natural to me to believe it. I cannot remember ever questioning in my mind the truthfulness of the Book of Mormon, or that Joseph Smith was a prophet. The question was: Are the Mormons sincere, and can I be one? I heard a great many hard remarks about the Missourians, and being one myself, I felt to resent the wholesale accusations made against them. About that time a great many ''dead beats" and ** winter Mormons" joined the Church, emigrants who stopped over simply for convenience. Quite a number came to Manti, led by one Loomas. They all joined the Church. They tried to induce me to be baptized when they were. I gave them a good cursing for being miser- able hypocrites, at which they only laughed, saying they would have the advantage of me among the girls, at least. Sometime near spring this gang arranged to make a general raid upon the settlements, and steal all the horses upon the range from Draperville going south through Utah valley. In those days numerous herds of horses ran loose, as the range was good. The gang of outlaws had confederates in Salt Lake City where some of them robbed a jeweler's store. They sent for me one night and laid their plans before me. They proposed that I would be their guide and meet them at the head of Spanish Fork Canyon, conduct them through to New Mexico and have one-fourth of all the horses. I declined the offer, telling them it was a good speculation, assign- ing as my reason for not going that I had not sufficiently recovered from my wounds to risk the trip. This they seemed to believe, as I was yet somewhat lame. They FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 39 made me promise not to betray them, and I soon satis- fied them on that point. I realized my awkward situation, but was determined to warn the people, thus putting them on their guard. Accordingly on going to Provo, I informed the Bishop of their plans ; he warned the different settlements and without any fuss the people were put on their guard. These men were closely watched until spring, when they all left for Lower California, most of them going about the time of the move to San Bernardino. In a fit of anger a friend of Loomas told me I would get killed some day, that Loomas was on my track. It is true I had in a measure betrayed him and his companions, still I had felt it my duty to do as I had done ; and to prevent myself being killed I resolved to kill him on sight. So intent was I on this, that I came near shooting another party, that I mistook for Loomas. At this time I was camped at Spanish Fork. As I was returning from a hunt, I saw a person sitting with his back toward me, that in every way resembled Loomas in point of size and peculiarity of dress. Loomas was expected to visit us. I approached with my gun ready, greatly tempted to shoot without speaking, as he was also armed, but thinking this cowardly I spoke in order to draw his attention when, on his turning round, another face presented itself As it turned out, no one knew of my intentions but myself. It makes me shudder even now when I think of my intentions and feelings at that time. I never saw any of the gang afterwards, but read an account of Loomas and others being lynched for robbery in California. My feelings at this time were very conflicting. I became fully convinced of the truth of Mormonism, and that it was my duty to obey, but I tried to excuse myself 40 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. in many ways. I said nothing to anyone, but kept up a ''terrible thinking." Being a Missourian it seemed, from the remarks made even in public, that salvation could never reach me. I remembered that my father always opposed mobocracy, so much so that he was called by some of our neighbors a Mormon. I was too proud to mention this to anyone; I knew I was honest and was not to blame for being born in Missouri. CHAPTER IV. My Baptism — Walker, the ''Napoleon of the Desert" — Raids in Lower California — He Tricks the Mexicans — Extinction of the Tribe. DURING the winter I made several trips to Salt Lake City in company with Patrick, one of the firm in whose employ I was. The winter was very cold, we were glad to get under shelter, no matter how poor it was. At that time there were few settlements from Salt Lake City to Manti. The first was at Willow Creek, Ebenezer Brown's farm, then Provo. The first house in American Fork was built in mid-winter, 1850-51, by Matt Caldwell. A bitter cold night brought four of us to this humble abode, made of unhewn cottonwood logs, where we were kindly greeted and housed for the night. Beyond Provo A. J. Stewart erected the first cabin at Peteteneet creek, which place is now known as Payson. From there on there were no settlements until Manti was reached. About this time, mid-winter, I commenced to con- sider whether it would not be best for me to go on to FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 4I California, make a lot of money, then return and join the Latter-day Saints. Arguing that they would have more confidence in me then than if I should join now. As I knew that "winter Mormons" were looked upon with suspicion, my mind was much occupied in trying to deter- mine what was best. After considering well the preju- dices I would have to meet, I finally spoke to Father Morley, who baptized me January 27th, 1851. There was over a foot of ice on the water at the time. When I spoke to Brother Morley about baptizing me, he was just starting out after a load of wood with his ax under his arm. He replied, 'T am ready; here is my ax to cut the ice. I have been expecting this for some time." I wondered why he expected it, as I had said nothing about my intentions. After baptism I felt more at ease, although I knew many doubted my sincerity. This made no difference as long as I knew I was sincere. I made quite an acquaint- ance with the Indians during the winter. Walker and portions of his band came around occasionally to trade. They were a fine race of people. Walker's life and exploits with his band would fill a volume ; he was some- times called the "Napoleon of the desert," being a great strategist, often out-generaling those he had^to meet in war or whom he designed to plunder. He often made raids into lower California, robbing the people and bring- ing away large herds of their best horses, always laying his plans with great skill so as to not lose his men. One of these trips made by him in 1852, I think, shows his ability. With about twenty-five of his most venturesome braves he went down. As usual, the Mexicans were expecting them and their best horses were corralled nightly, their picked saddle horses, valued so highly by every Mexican gentleman, were kept in 42 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. Stables under guard. Walker and party succeeded in cutting an opening in the rear of the corral, turning out the stock and getting away with them. This time the Mexicans were determined to follow them into the desert, make a good killing and recover their stock. They had not expected such a bold move as cutting into the corral, but as soon as it was discovered the Mexicans started in hot pursuit. Walker pushed on with all speed, passing a spring where he calculated the Mexicans would make a short halt. Here he left fifteen of his men afoot secreted near the spring. Soon the Mexicans arrived, having ridden hard for some distance. As Walker expected, they were soon unsaddled, their horses tied out to grass and all hands asleep, expecting to take an hour's rest and then go on. The Indians waited till all were settled, then quietly loosened the horses, each one mounted, some taking the lead while others drove the loose animals. After reaching a safe distance from gun- shot they gave a loud whoop and started to run. I have seen them in mimicry go through the whole performance, showing how the Mexicans looked when they realized the situation. The Indians always claimed that there was nothing hostile in this, as they killed no one. At the present time I do not know of one representative of this once powerful band. Walker could meet and out-general his Indian foes and outwit the Mexicans; in fact, hold his own with almost anyone whom he met ; but neither he nor his band could stand fine fiour and good living. This finally, more than anything else, conquered them. I sometimes wonder if the Latter-day Saints have done their duty toward thess Indians, professing, as we do, that they are of the seed of Israel. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 43 CHAPTER V. Patrick and Glenn fail — Patrick a Rascal — He Robs Enoch Reece. T REMAINED in MantI until April, 1851, when I, still 1 in the employ of Patrick and Glenn, came down to Spanish Fork and helped to open the first farm on that stream ; it was known as the Reece farm. Here we had many Utes about us. I often traded with them and they were always friendly remarking that I had a differ- ent expression in my eyes, a more kindly look than the people in general had for them. The fact is, I felt from the depths of my heart sincere friendship for them, and no doubt manifested it in my looks. My employers had failed in business, having no capital to commence with, and turned over their property to the Reece Brothers of Salt Lake City. Patrick proved to be a rascal. When I called on him for a settlement he denied the most he was owing me. He was then in Provo, in charge of several thou- sand dollars worth of stock belonging to Enoch Reece, who was sending him out to meet his train of merchan- dise coming in. He was to meet it at Green river. I was determined to make him pay me before he went on. Finally, he offered to settle by arbitration, naming a person. I felt safe with this proposal and asked him if he would abide the decision if I would. He answered yes. I felt sure of the money, for I had great confidence in the person chosen. He seemed a just and good man and in my simplicity I supposed he would be able to judge correctly in the case. I was careful not to make any demand excepting what I knew to be perfectly just. 44 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. Mr. Patrick denied in toto my account, and the arbitra- tor decided that I was attempting to wrong Mr. Patrick. This was a "stumper" for me, but I said I would stand it, and inasmuch as I had to pay for the privilege, I intended to tell all hands what I thought of them. I then told the arbitrator that he had believed a lie and condemned the truth, that some day he would know it, and that Mr. Patrick would get away with Brother Reece's property, for he had proven himself a thief Enoch Reece was present and resented what I said, telling me to stop talking, but I made my little speech all the same. About six weeks afterwards I met Brother Reece in Provo and the first words he said to me were: ''Well, Brother Jones, what do you think has occurred?" I re- plied, " Patrick has got away with your stock." *' Yes," said he, "he has sold the whole of it and 'sloped' for Ogden." I told him I was glad of it, for he might have listened to me. I also learned afterwards what had blinded the arbitrator. He was owing Mr. Patrick some five hundred dollars, and the latter had told him he could wait six months for all except what was owing Jones ; so all that was decided in my favor he had to look up. Consequently it was easy to understand why Patrick did not owe me much ! ! ! I had not belonged to the Church long, but if any one had. hinted to me that my faith was shaken in Mormonism by this unjust decision, I should have resented it as an insult. To me it was simply a human weakness which Mormonism had nothing to do with. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 45 CHAPTER VI. My visit to Salt Lake City — Introduction to Brigham Young — Ordained a Seventy — Judge Brochus' Speech. MY HEALTH became entirely restored. After com- ing to Provo I worked wherever there was a demand for help, and after harvest was over I concluded to go to Salt Lake City to have a rest and play the gen- tleman for awhile. This did not last long. I arrived one Saturday, spent Sunday in the city and on Monday morning started for a stroll through town, met an ac- quaintance, Lyman Woods from Provo, and stood talking to him in the street, when we were approached by a man who enquired of my friend, if he knew of anyone he could get to help harvest twenty acres of late wheat. He seemed anxious, saying he could find no one, and that his wheat was going to waste. I told him I would help him. He looked at me a moment, then said he wanted a man who could follow him, and rake and bind what he cut. I replied that I could do it. Still looking at me he commenced laughing and said, "Well, you will have to change your clothing anyway." My friend then introduced me to Mr. Edmund Ellsworth, President Young's son-in-law, and told him I was a good worker. Brother Ellsworth told me to get ready and come on. I soon changed to buckskin pants and hickory shirt and returned. He remarked, "You will do now." I had never till this time thought dress made any difference in a man's looks in regard to work. We finished up the wheat and returned to town. On Saturday after supper, Brother Ellsworth said, "We will now go and see Brother Brigham, who lives opposite, in the white house." I 46 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. asked him to wait until I changed my clothes. This he would not allow, but insisted I should go as I was, add- ing that Brother Brigham did not judge a man by his dress. I went and can say I was completely won by President Young's manner. He asked me a great many questions, and I was satisfied that he did not doubt my sincerity. He gave me a note to Brother Joseph Young, directing him to ordain me a Seventy, saying that he wanted me to preach the gospel wherever I had an opportunity, especially to the people speaking the Span- ish language. I went and was ordained September 8th, 1 85 1, by Joseph Young. I remained in the city some time boarding with Brother Ellsworth. I was present at the meeting where Judge Brochus delivered his famous speech, in which he applied to the women of Utah for a block for the Wash- ington monument, telling them that before they contrib- uted to so glorious a work they must become virtuous, and teach their daughters to become so. I sat and list- ened, looking at Brother Brigham who sat perfectly still with his mouth twisted a little to one side. Beginning to lose my respect for him and Mormons generally, I spoke to a man sitting next to me, Brother Everett, telling him I would not allow such talk, if I had a wife or mother there ; that I would kick Brochus out of the stand. Brother Everett, being more patient, told me to wait. When Brother Brigham arose and answered Brochus, I understood why nothing had been said to interfere with his speech. Brochus was given full liberty to "empty himself" Then he got his dose, which so frightened him that he and his companions left for the States in a few days. No one threatened him or his associates, but he was simply told what he was and who the people were that listened to his abuse. This did him up entirely. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 47 CHAPTER VII. The City Santa Fe — Traditions Concerning it — The Early Settlers — My Desires to Travel — The Slave Trade. 1 RETURNED to Provo after the October conference. Soon after my return a large party of Mexican traders from New Mexico arrived in Utah and camped near by. They came in on their usual trading business, the main object being to buy Indian children for slaves. That the reader may more fully understand the sit- uation, I will give a little of the history and customs of New Mexico. Santa Fe is one of the oldest cities in the United States. The correct history is not perfectly known, but the one told by the natives, and generally accepted, is that soon after the conquest of Mexico by Cortez, an expedition went out to explore the northern country. Nothing was heard from them, and all trace was lost, until a number of years afterwards, when another party went north. On arriving at Santa Fe they found a people among whom many of the younger ones spoke the Spanish language. They found, after much trouble and enquiry, that these were children of the former explorers, who, on arriving in that country, had found rich mines of gold and silver. They concluded to keep silent and work these mines for themselves. They also found the natives peaceable and in every way well disposed toward them. These natives lived in towns and cultivated the soil. The Spaniards took wives from among the natives ; and all went well, until the Spaniards had accumulated many millions of dollars, when they began to tire of their friends and families, and longed for the more congenial society of the people they had 48 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. left, believing that with their great wealth they would be received with honor, consequently they determined to abandon all their new made friends and return to Old Mexico. The natives remonstrated, for they now looked upon them as a part of their tribe, inasmuch as they had given them wives and homes, and had assisted and pro- tected them in every way. The Spaniards had made them believe that they were directed by the Great Spirit to come among them and be united with them. So when they proposed leaving, the natives looked upon them as deceivers and forbade their departure. The Spaniards heeded not their warnings and felt no apprehensions, for the natives were not a warlike people. So, with their treasure, they started south, but were attacked and all killed. Tradition says that their treasure is buried in a plain near a salt lake, south of Santa Fe. That there is more or less truth in all this, can not be doubted, for history tells us that the second party found descendants of these former explorers in Santa Fe where they had built quite a village and worked mines. In fact, much evidence was found to corroborate the statement of the natives, although no records were found, and not one of the original Spaniards was living. The second party remained and reported themselves to the government of Mexico. Others came and strengthened the colony; the mines were worked, yielding immense wealth ; the Catholic Church was established among the natives, the Spaniards taking Indian women for wives ; the natives became converted and adopted Spanish civilization, mixed with their own traditions; a new class of people, com- monly called Spanish Mexicans, was the result. A few of the natives retained their ancient customs, remaining apart and never mixing with others. Many of these can still be found living in towns and villages along the Rio FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 49 Grande. They are known as Pueblos, and are much more honest and moral than the mixed race. New Mexico was almost an unknown country to the people of the United States until the last half cen- tury. Many of the pioneer traders to that land were from Howard County, Missouri^ where I was born, and I remember when a child hearing numbers of them on their return recount their exploits and strange expe- riences. I felt as if I could not wait to be a man before going to see these strange countries and peoples. Well do I remember when studying geography at school and seeing "unexplored region" marked on the map, feeling a contempt for the author and thinking if I were a man I would go and see what there was in that land and not mark it unexplored. These New Mexicans were a venturesome people. They penetrated through to California ; trails were opened that were a marvel of pioneering. They were doubtless assisted by the natives. The Jesuits were- leaders in most of these moves. There is hardly a tribe of Indians in the Rocky Mountains . but what has a tradition of the priests having been among them. Sometimes these priests gained quite an influence with the wild tribes. At one time the Uintahs were their friends, but a break occurred and the priests were killed. Thus we find that; the people of New Mexico at the time I am writing of them, in 1851, were making annual trips, commencing with a few goods, trading on their way with either Nav- ajoes or Utes (generally with the Navajoes) for horses, which they sold very cheap, always retaining their best ones. These used-up horses were brought through and traded to the poorer Indians for children. The horses were often used for food. This trading was continued into Lower California, where the children bought on the 50 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. down trip would be traded to the Mexican-Californians for other horses, goods or cash. Many times a small outfit on the start would return with large herds of California stock. All children bought on the return trip would be taken back to New Mexico and then sold, boys fetching on an average $ioo, girls from $150 to $200. The girls were in demand to bring up for house servants, having the reputation of making better servants than any others. This slave trade gave rise to the cruel wars between the native tribes of this country, from Salt Lake down to the tribes in southern Utah. Walker and his band raided on the weak tribes, taking their children prisoners and selling them to the Mexicans. Many of the lower classes, inhabiting the southern deserts, would sell their own children for a horse and kill and eat the horse. The Mexicans were as fully established and systematic in this trade as ever were the slavers on the seas and to them it was a very lucrative business. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 5 1 CHAPTER. VIII. Governor Brigham Young Checks the Slave Trade — The Prosecution of Offenders — A Noted Trial — A Cruel Argument to Induce Mormons to Buy Indian Children. AT THIS time Brigham Young was governor of Utah and had the oversight of Indian affairs. Some Httle business in the slave trade had been done on the trip the summer before by our old guide, who was a regular trader. Governor Young asked me something about this business, telling me to look out, and if any of these traders came in, to let him know,- as the laws of the United States, which then extended over this Territory, prohibited this business, and that it would be his duty to put a stop to the same. He hoped to do this by advis- ing these traders in regard to the present conditions. When this party of traders spoken of arrived, Governor Young was notified and came to Provo. The leaders of this company came to see the governor, I acting as interpreter. Mr. Young had the law read and explained to them, showing them that from this on they were under obligations to observe the laws of the United States instead of Mexico ; that the treaty of Guadalupe de Hidalgo, had changed the conditions, and that from this on they were under the control of the United States. He further showed that it was a cruel practice to enslave human beings, and explained that the results of such a business caused war and bloodshed among the Indian tribes. The Mexicans listened with respect, admitting that the traffic would have to cease. It was plainly shown to them that it was a cruel business which could not be 52 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. tolerated any longer ; but as it had been an old established practice, they were not so much to blame for following the traffic heretofore. Now it was expected that this business would be discontinued. All seemed satisfied and pledged their words that they would return to their homes without trading for chil- dren. Most of them kept their promise, but one small party, under Pedro Lion, violated their obligations and were arrested and brought before the United States court, Judge Snow presiding. This was quite a noted case. I was employed as interpreter. George A. Smith defended the prisoners, and Colonel Blair prosecuted with great wisdom and tact, he knowing all about the Mexican character, having been in the Texan war. A great deal of prejudice and bitter feeling was manifested toward the Mexicans. Governor Young seeing this, used all his influence that they might have a fair and impartial trial, and the law be vindicated in a spirit of justice and not in the spirit of persecution. The defence made by the Mexicans was that the Indians had stolen a lot of horses from them and that they had followed and overtaken them. On coming to their camp they found the Indians had killed and eaten the horses. The only remuneration they could get was to take some children which the Indians offered in pay- ment, saying they did not mean to break their promise. This defence had some weight, whether true or not. Still they were found guilty and fined. The trial lasted several days ; the fines were afterwards remitted, and the Mexicans allowed to return home. They had been delayed some time, and made nothing on their trip. No doubt they felt sour, but considering the law, they were dealt leniently with. This broke up the Indian slave trade. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 53 Stopping this slave business helped to sour some of Walker's band. They were in the habit of raiding on the Pahutes and low tribes, taking their children pris- oners and selling them. Next year when they came up and camped on the Provo bench, they had some Indian children for sale. They offered them to the Mormons who declined buying. Arapine, Walker's brother, became enraged saying that the Mormons had stopped the Mexicans from buying these children ; that they had no right to do so, unless they bought them themselves. Several of us were present when he took one of these children by the heels and dashed its brains out on the hard ground, after which he threw the body towards us, telling us we had no hearts, or we would have bought it and saved its Hfe. This was a strange argument, but it was the argument of an enraged savage. I never heard of any successful attempts to buy children after- wards by the Mexicans. If done at all it was secretly. CHAPTER IX. My Marriage — Peaceful Life Among the Savages— Dr. Bowman Seeks Trouble— He is Killed^by the Indians— The ''Walker War"— Its Cause — A Thrilling Situation. ON THE 29th of January, 1852, Miss Harriet Emily Colton was united to me in marriage. All I will say at present is, that her life and labors are as much a part of mine as is possible for a wife's to be. She was my heart's choice from first sight, and so continued till the day of her death. We lived on a farm quite a dis- 54 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. tance from the settlement for some time after our mar- riage. My wife's father, Philander Colton, went to Cali- fornia the spring we were married, leaving me in charge of his farm and affairs. The farm was near the Indian camping ground ; hundreds of them were often around us. Sometimes they were more or less saucy, but we treated them kindly. My wife seemed to have the same spirit as myself in regard to the Indians, feeling friendly towards them and wishing to see them taught and helped out of their degraded condition. Nothing occurred in my experience during the re- mainder of the year worth recording. All of the Indians around were friendly toward us, but frequently spoke of being dissatisfied with the treatment received from some others. Many will say, and with some truthfulness, that Indians visit their revenge upon whites indiscriminately. Yet if one treats them so as to get their real friendship, they are not apt to harm him. I went as interpreter for President Young in the spring of 1853, to Sanpete county, where ^ome disturb- ance was threatened by Mexicans under the leadership of a certain Dr. Bowman from New Mexico who seemed inclined to make himself a name by committing some violent act in defiance of law. There seemed to be a determination on his part and those with him to revive the slave trade. He threatened anyone that might inter- fere with him, saying he could bring all the Indians in the mountains to help him. I was acquainted with this man while in New Mexico. I met him while on a trip to Sanpete valley a few days before I went with President Young's party. The moment Bowman saw me he began to curse me for being a Mormon, saying he had power at his back to use all the Mormons up. I felt some little friendship for him as is natural for me to feel for FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 55 anyone I have formerly known, and advised him to act more careful, or he would get into trouble. I tried to reason with him, but to no purpose, he went on down to Utah valley, and there acted in an insulting and threaten- ing manner. Bowman's Mexicans were encamped on the west side of the Sanpete valley. It was deemed prudent to bring them in and keep an eye on them, until it could be decided what their intentions were, for at this time it was seen that a growing spirit of war was upon the Indians, and almost anything would stir them up. Several little fusses of a private nature had lately occurred. At this time many of the settlers, contrary to the counsel of President Young, had settled on farms and were much exposed. This had a tendency to make the Indians aggressive. Many times the settlers were sorely annoyed by the Indians' horses getting into the fields. When remonstrated with they would ask, ''Whose lands are these you are on." The continual advice of Presi- dent Young was to build in towns, fence their lands and be kind to the Indians ; that it was cheaper to feed than to fight them, etc. Some heeded this counsel, while many did not. I was one of a party of four or five who went out and brought in the Mexicans. They were a little sus- picious, asking a great many questions about Bowman, where he was, etc. But I finally persuaded them to go with us. We had no authority to arrest them, neither was it the intention to do so, if it could be avoided. In the meantime Bowman got into some trouble with the Indians by deceiving them in some of their promised trades, and he was ambushed and killed by some of them. Owing to his manner and threats, it was rumored the Mormons had killed him. I was actively engaged as 56 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. interpreter and was continually around during this time. I never had the least suspicion or proof that Bowman was killed by any Mormon agency, and I believe I would have heard something of it, if such had been the case. I know in those days it was no uncommon thing for a man to be killed whether a Mormon or not by the Indians, either for revenge or plunder. The Mexicans soon left in peace. In the summer of 1853, about harvest time, the war broke out. The immediate cause of the Indian war was the striking of an Indian with a gun by a white man at Springville. This Indian was whipping his squaw, when the party interfered to stop him. The Indian drew his gun to shoot, it was wrenched from him. The man using the gun as a club, broke both stock and Indian's head. I believe the Indian died from the effects of the blow ; he was one of Walker's band, and the latter at once painted for war. The same day A. J. Stewart and I were returning from Payson. When about a mile from there some twenty-five warriprs .painted black, came from a ravine, approaching us in flank with guns and bows ready. Mr. Stewart remarked, "We are in for it; that means war." We had no time to turn and run as they were within one hundred yards of us. I knew I had never wronged them, but had always been a friend, and I believed if we went straight along they would not hurt us. Brother Stewart agreed with me. We never halted or gave the road, but drove along as though nothing was in the way. As we went they parted and allowed us the road, never speaking or making any sign of recognition. This same party went on up to the Payson mill and in less than an hour commenced killing our people. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 57 This was the commencement of what Is known as the Walker War. It caused a general moving in of those who had settled out on farrfis, making towns and villages spring up like magic. I remember President Young re- marking in public that the people seemed readier to obey Brother Walker's invitation to live together in towns, than they did his counsel. Brother Brigham always gave Walker great credit for helping to build up Utah. There was plenty to do as soon as the war commenced. An attempt was made to follow and chastise the Indians, but nothing that resulted in much good was ever done by fighting them. The counsel was for all to move in, gather the stock together, and in every way possible g^ard against attacks or surprises. There was a general move in this direction ; cattle were gathered and herded under strong guards. Guards were also placed at the different trails leading into the valley. This had a much better effect than following the Indians, getting shot at and having to retreat in good order. There was quite a band of Provo Indians who took no part in the fight ; they were camped on the bench near the river bottom. I had not yet moved into town ; the Indians were around me daily and I believed them to be friendly. An order was issued by some one in Provo to have them taken prisoners and brought in. Accordingly a company of militia was called out for the purpose. Happening along just as they were starting on the ex- pedition, I was asked to go and help take the Indians, but declined, and protested against the move, well know- ing that they would not be taken, as they had done noth- ing to justify any harsh measures against them. My remonstrance was in vain, the Indians had to be taken, and I was ordered to go as interpreter. So we marched over in good militia style, every man keeping step with 58 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. himself. I felt much amused at our turnout going to war. The flower of our army was then out after Walker. As we neared the camp of Indians I asked permission to go ahead and tell them what was wanted. I was on horseback and unarmed ; the Indians were up at once and ready for fight. They said that taking them prison- ers meant to kill them, and they would not go. The company numbering some twenty-five men — about the same number as the Indians — had now come up and stood about fifty yards off, facing the camp. I went and told the captain what the Indians said. He replied, *' Then we have got to take them by force." At the same time ordering his company to load their guns. I now became frightened, for I knew if they commenced loading, the Indians having their guns ready, would fire the minute they saw the whites making such a movement; but as long as they did not know that the guns were not loaded we were safe. I asked the captain to hold a minute and let me ask a few questions. He agreed. ** How many of you have loads in your guns?" I asked. No one had. Several spoke and said they had noth- ing to load with, while some of the guns were out of repair. I never before or since saw anything so ridicu- lous. Some of the members of the company are still living in Provo, and will remember the incident. I asked the captain what he thought best to do ; he said he would take my advice under the circumstances. I told him I would say to the Indians that it was all right; that they were friends ; and we did not think it right to take them but would go back. This made them suspicious. They moved off up Provo canyon and committed various petty thefts from time to time, annoying the people for several months. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. ' 59 CHAPTER X. My Interview With Brother George A. Smith — My Ill-natured Remark — He Wins me by Kindness — His Noble Character — Peace With the Indians. WHEN the troubles began Brother George A. Smith, who was presiding in Utah county was in Salt Lake City. There was much confusion in the county. All the cattle belonging to Provo, twelve hundred head, were got together on the lake bottom. Barney Ward and I were placed as guard over them, with orders not to let them get away. We stayed with them until we were about worn out. No one would come to our relief till Brother Smith came to give directions. On the third day we heard he had arrived. I went in early to see him. I had not slept for three nights and had been in the saddle most of the time, consequently I did not feel very good-natured. As I was going up to Brother Smith's house I met three of the principal brethren on the street. They asked where I was going. I told them to see Brother Smith. They replied that he was not up and I could not see him. I answered, 'T will go and see." Sure enough they were right and somewhat sarcastically said, *'You will learn some day to not be in such a hurry." I was very angry and made an ill-natured remark. After going and getting my breakfast I went back to G. A. Smith's house. He was sitting by the door in company with the men I had met before. Brother Smith shook hands with me saying, 'T understand you called me a big lazy lout. What do you mean by such talk ? Did you say it ? " I repHed ''Yes sir. 6o • FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. I have been up with Brother Ward three nights herding cattle ; he is with the cattle now, we are worn out and cannot stand it any longer ; I thought when you only rode from Salt Lake City in a carriage, and have slept all night, you could just as well get up and attend to business as for us to be up three nights. That is why I said it." Brother Smith turned to one of these men, saying, "Go get some men and relieve Brother Barney immedi- ately. Bro. Jones go home and go to sleep ; when you wake up you will feel better." I felt ashamed for Bro. Smith manifested no anger. When I awoke in the afternoon I went to see Bro. Smith intending to ask his pardon. On seeing me he took me by the hand, laughing heartily, asking me if I felt any better, and talking in a very pleasant manner, giving me no chance to apologize. Many years after- wards he spoke of it, and laughed about it as a good joke. I relate this to show the nobility of his character, being above small prejudice. I have met others who ought to be as good as Brother Smith, who would never have forgiven me if I had made such a remark about them. How long the war continued is a question. Active hostilities were kept up more or less according to oppor- tunities during the summer of '53. When the Indians had a good chance they would steal or kill. Some were more or less peaceable when it suited them. I never went out to fight as I made no pretensions whatever of being an Indian fighter. I did my portion of military duty. I assisted in various ways in helping to protect ourselves against the natives, but I always made it a rule to culti- vate a friendly feeling whenever opportunity presented; so much so that the Indians always recognized me as a FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 6 1 friend to their race. I had learned some little about military affairs while in Mexico. I assisted in organizing and drilling the militia from time to time. I also acted as adjutant under Col. P. W. Conover as early as '51. afterwards filled the same position under Col. Pace in '53. I did not like the office and resigned, but was in- duced to accept the office again for the purpose of mak- ing out returns to the government for services rendered by some of the Utah militia. These returns were accepted, the men paid, and land warrants issued. I was assisted by L. J. Nuttall and G. W. Hickman as clerks. After this Brother Nuttall was appointed in my place and continued to act under Col. Pace to my knowl- edge, as late as the Echo Canyon War. President Young advised the people to wall in their towns. This puzzled the Indians. We told them it was our intention to shut them out and have no more to do with them. This they did not like for there was no great length of time, but what some of the different bands were on friendly terms with the settlers. Walker finally said if we would quit building walls, they would quit fighting. But the good peace was broken, and there was always some of the whites holding grudges against the Indians. Still we called it peace. The local troubles are matters of general history. I aim to deal more with that which is not written. I always considered the natives entitled to a hearing as well as the whites. Both were often in the wrong. The white men should be patient and just with the Indians and not demand of them in their untutored condition the same responsibility they would of the more intelligent class. Further along in this history we will see the Indians' defence. 62 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. CHAPTER XI. President Young calls for Volunteers to meet the Hand-cart Company — I Join the Party — Names of the Company — One party of Emigrants found in a Starving Condition. T ATTENDED the October conference of 1856. When 1 conference was opened President Young arose and said: "There area number of our people on the plains who have started to come with hand-carts ; they will need help and I want twenty teams to be ready by morning with two men to each team to go out and meet them. If the teams are not voluntarily furnished, there are plenty of good ones in the street and I shall call upon Brother J. C. Little, the marshal, to furnish them. Now we will adjourn this conference until to-morrow." Brother Young was in earnest ; he seemed moved by a spirit that would admit of no delay. A few days before this a number of elders had arrived from the old country reporting that the hand-cart people were on the road, but they did not know how far they had advanced. In those days there was no tele- graph, and mails from the east only reached Utah monthly, they being many times delayed by high water, Indians or other causes. Brother Young called upon every one present to lend a hand in fitting up these teams. As I was going out with the crowd, Brother Wells spoke to me saying: ''You are a good hand for the trip ; get ready." Soon after Bishop Hunter said the same thing to me. Also Brother Grant met me and said : 'T want you on this trip." I began to think it time to decide, so I answered, ''all right." FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 63 I had a saddle horse. We were instructed to get everything we could ready and rendezvous between the Big and Little Mountains, a short day's drive out from Salt Lake. Next day teams and volunteer men were ready. A better outfit and one more adapted to the work before us I do not think could have possibly been selected if a week had been spent in fitting up. Besides the wagons and teams, several men went horseback. We had good teams and provisions in great abundance. But best of all, those going were alive to the work and were of the best material possible for the occasion. As soon as all were together we organized and moved on. George D. Grant was selected captain, with Robert Burton and William Kimball as assistants ; Cyrus Wheelock, chaplain ; Charles Decker, guide. I was given the important position of chief cook for the head mess. I was quite proud of my office, for it made me the most sought after and popular man in the camp. The rest of the company was made up of the following per- sons: Joseph A. Young, Chauncey Webb, H. H. Cluff, D. P. Kimball, George W. Grant, Ed. Peck, Joel Parrish, Henry Goldsbrough, Thomas Alexander, Benjamin Hampton, Thomas Ricks, Abe Garr, Charles Grey, Al Hundngton, ''Handsome Cupid," Stephen Taylor, Wil- liam K. Broomhead, Ira Nebeker, Redick Allred, Amos Fairbanks and Tom Bankhead, a colored man. These are all the names that I remember, if there were any more I have been unable to find them. The weather soon became cold and stormy. We traveled hard, never taking time to stop for dinner. On getting into camp all were hungry and willing to help. No doubt many of the boys remember the hearty suppers eaten on this expedition. There was some expectation of meeting the first train, Brother Willie's, on or about 64 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. Green river. We began to feel great anxiety about the emigrants as the weather was now cold and stormy, and we, strong men with good outfits, found the nights severe. What must be the condition of those we were to meet. Many old men and women, little children, mothers with nursing babes, crossing the plains pulling hand-carts. Our hearts began to ache when we reached Green river and yet no word of them. Here an express was sent on ahead with a light wagon to meet and cheer the people up. Cyrus Wheelock and Stephen Taylor went with this express. At the South Pass, we encountered a severe snow- storm. After crossing the divide we turned down into a sheltered place on the Sweetwater. While in camp and during the snow-storm two men were seen on horseback going west. They were hailed. On reaching us they proved to be Brothers Willie and J. B. Elder. They reported their company in a starving condition at their camp then east of Rocky Ridge and said our express had gone on to meet the other companies still in the rear. We started immediately through the storm to reach Brother Willie's camp. On arriving we found them in a con- dition that would stir the feelings of the hardest heart. They were in a poor place, the storm having caught them where fuel was scarce. They were out of provisions and really freezing and starving to death. The morning after our arrival nine were buried in one grave. We did all we could to relieve them. The boys struck out on horseback and dragged up a lot of wood ; provisions were distributed and all went to work to cheer the sufferers. Soon there was an improvement in camp, but many poor, faithful people had gone too far — had passed beyond the power to recruit. Our help came too late for some and many died after our arrival. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 65 William Kimball with a few men and wagons turned back, taking the oversight of this company to help them in. Capt. Grant left a wagon load of flour near the Pass with Redick Allred to guard it. There were several hundred people with Brother Willie. They had a few teams, but most of them had become too weak to be of much service. When we left Salt Lake it was under- stood that other teams would follow until all the help needed would be on the road. The greater portion of our company now continued on towards Devil's Gate, traveling through snow all the way. When we arrived at Devil's Gate we found our express there awaiting us. No tidings as yet were re- ceived of the other companies. CHAPTER XII. Myself and two Companions sent to Search for Missing Companies — We find Them — Our Cool Reception at One Camp — Apathy Manifested — Terrible Sufferings. HAVING seen the sufferings of Brother Willie's company, we more fully realized the danger the others were in. The Elders who had just returned from England having many dear friends with these companies, suffered great anxiety, some of them feeling more or less the responsibility resting upon them for allowing these people to start so late in the season across the plains. At first we were at a loss what to do for we did not expect to have to go further than Devil's Gate. We decided to make camp and send on an express to find 66 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. where the people were and not to return until they were found. Joseph A. Young, Abe Garr and I were selected. (Some histories give other names, but I was there my- self and am not mistaken). With picked saddle horses and a pack mule we started out. The first night we camped, our horses followed a band of buffaloes several miles ; it was near noon the next day when we returned with them. We determined to get even with them so rode at full gallop wherever the the road would permit. After riding about twelve miles we saw a white man's shoe track in the road. Bro. Young called out, "Here they are." We put our animals to their utmost speed and soon came in sight of the camp at Red Bluff. This was Brother Edward Martin's hand- cart company and Ben Horgett's wagon company. There was still another wagon company down near the Platte crossing. This company was in almost as bad a condition as the first one. They had nearly given up hope. Their provisions were about exhausted and many of them worn out and sick. When we rode in, there was a general rush to shake hands. I took no part in the ceremony. Many declared we were angels from heaven. I told them I thought we were better than angels for this occa- sion, as we were good strong men come to help them into the valley, and that our company, and wagons loaded with provisions, were not far away. I thought this the best consolation under the circumstances. Brother Young told the people to gather '*up" and move on at once as the only salvation was to travel a little every day. This was right and no doubt saved many lives for we, among so many, (some twelve hundred) could do but little, and there was danger of starvation before help FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 67 could arrive unless the people made some head-way toward the valley. After talking to and encouraging the people, they agreed to start on the next morning. We then started full gallop for John Hunt's camp fifteen miles further. On arriving no one noticed us or appeared to care who we were. Their tents were pitched in good shape, wood was plentiful, and no one seemed concerned. Joseph A. Young became offended, not expecting such a cool re- ception and remarked, ''Well it appears we are not needed here." So we went down into the bottom, and made camp for ourselves. After a while some one sauntered down our way, thinking probably we were mountaineers. These recognized Brother Young and made a rush for camp, giving the word; soon we were literally carried in and a special tent was pitched for our use. Everything was done to make " amends " for the previous neglect. I never could see where the amends came in, for no one happened to know us when we first arrived, and strangers were often passing, this being near where several camps of old traders were located. About the time we were settled in our tent, Captain Hunt and Gilbert Van Schoonhoven, his assistant, arrived from the Platte bridge, also Captain Ben Horgett. They were rejoiced to meet us. Here I first met "Gib Spen- cer" and formed a friendly acquaintance with him which continues to this day. These people were just on the eve of suffering, but as yet had not. Quite a number of their cattle had died during the snow storm which had now been on them for nine days. Next morning Brother Young and others went to Platte bridge, leaving Brother Garr and I to get the company started according to agreement made the even- 68 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. ing before. There was a spirit of apathy among the people, instead of going for their teams at once, several began to quarrel about who should go. This made us feel like leaving them to take care of themselves. We saddled up to do so. The clouds were gathering thickly for storm, and just as we were about to start it com- menced snowing very hard. The heavens were obscured by clouds, excepting a small place about the shape of the gable end of a house. This opening was in the direc- tion of the valley and the sun seemed to shine through with great brightness. We mounted our mules ; Brother Garr, pointing to the bright spot in the heavens, said, **Do you see that hole? You had better all get out of here before that closes up, for it is your opening to the valley. We are going." The people, I believe, took this for a warning and soon started for their cattle. Next morning they moved on. Brother Garr and I went back to where E. Martin's camp had been. They had rolled out and Captain Horgetts wagon company were just starting. We continued on, overtaking the hand-cart company ascending a long muddy hill. A condition of distress here met my eyes that I never saw before or since. The train was strung out for three or four miles. There were old men pulling and tugging their carts, sometimes loaded with a sick wife or children — women pulling along sick husbands — little children six to eight years old strug- gling through the mud and snow. As night came on the mud would freeze on their clothes and feet. There were two of us and hundreds needing help. What could we do? We gathered on to some of the most helpless with our riatas tied to the carts, and helped as many as we could into camp on Avenue hill. This was a bitter, cold night and we had no FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 69 fuel except very small sage brush. Several died that night. Next morning, Brother Young having come up, we three started for our camp near Devil's Gate. All were rejoiced to get the news that we had found the emigrants. The following morning most of the company moved down, meeting the hand-cart company at Greasewood creek. Such assistance as we could give was rendered to all until they finally arrived at Devil's Gate fort about the I St of November. There were some twelve hun- dred in all, about one-half with hand-carts and the other half with teams. CHAPTER XIII. Short Rations — Wagons Unloaded of Their Freight and Loaded With Emigrants — Myself and Company Left to Guard the goods — One Sister's Discouragement. THE winter storms had now set in, in all their severity. The provisions we took amounted to almost nothing among so many people, many of them now on very short rations, some almost starving. Many were dying daily from exposure and want of food. We were at a loss to know why others had not come on to our assist- ance. The company was composed of average emigrants: old, middle-aged and young ; women and children. The men seemed to be failing and dying faster than the women and children. The hand-cart company was moved over to a cove in the mountains for shelter and fuel : a distance of two 70 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. miles from the fort. The wagons were banked near the fort. It became impossible to travel further without reconstruction or help. We did all we possibly could to help and cheer the people. Some writers have endeavored to make individual heroes of some of our company. I have no remembrance of any one shirking his duty. Each and everyone did all they possibly could and justice would give to each his due credit. All the people who could, crowded into the houses of the fort out of the cold and storm. One crowd cut away the walls of the house they were in for fuel, until half of the roof fell in ; fortunately they were all on the protected side and no one was hurt. Many suggestions were offered as to what should be done, some efforts being made to cache the imperishable goods and go on with the rest. Accordingly pits were dug, boxes opened and the hardware, etc., put in one, while clothing, etc., were put in another. Often these boxes belonged to different persons. An attempt was made by Brother Cantwell, to keep an account of these changes. This caching soon proved to be a failure for the pits would fill, up with drifting snow as fast as the dirt was f thrown out, so no caches were made. The goods were never replaced. Each evening the Elders would meet in council. I remember hearing Charles Decker remark that he had crossed the plains over fifty times (carrying the mail) and this was the darkest hour he had ever seen. Cattle and horses were dying every day. What to do was all that . could be talked about. Five or six days had passed and nothing determined upon. Steve Taylor, Al. Huntington and I were together when the question, ''Why doesn't Captain Grant leave FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 7 1 all the goods here with some one to watch them, and move on ?" was asked. We agreed to make this pro- posal to him. It was near the time appointed for the meeting. ' As soon as we were together, Capt. Grant asked if anyone had thought of a plan. We presented ours. Capt. Grant replied, "I have thought of this, but there are no provisions to leave and it would be asking too much of anyone to stay here and starve for the sake of these goods ; besides, where is there a man who would stay if called upon." I answered, "Any of us would." I had no idea I would be selected, as it was acknowledged I was the best cook in camp and Capt. Grant had often spoken as though he could not spare me. That a proper understanding may be had, I will say that these goods were the luggage of a season's emi- gration that these two wagon trains had contracted to freight, and it was being taken through as well as the luggage of the people present. Leaving these goods meant to abandon all that many poor families had upon earth. So it was different from common merchandise. There was a move made at once to adopt this sug- gestion. Accordingly, next morning store rooms in the fort were cleared and some two hundred wagons run in and unloaded. No one was allowed to keep out any- thing but a change of clothing, some bedding and light cooking utensils. Hauling provisions was not a weighty question. This unloading occupied three days. The hand- cart people were notified to abandon most of their carts. Teams were hitched up and the sick and feeble loaded in with such light weight as was allowed. All became common property. When everything was ready Brother Burton said to 72 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. me, *'Now Brother Jones we want you to pick two men from the valley to stay with you. We have notified Captains Hunt and Horgett to detail seventeen men from their companies to stay with you. We will move on in the morning. Get your company together and such provisions as you can find in the hands of those who may have anything to spare. You know ours is about out. Will you do it?" I said, "Yes." "Well take your choice from our company. You are acquainted with the boys and whoever you want will stay." I had a great mind to tell him I wanted Captains Qrant and Burton. There was not money enough on earth to have hired me to stay. I had left home for only a few days and was not prepared to remain so long away ; but I remembered my assertion that any of us would stay if called upon. I could not back out, so I selected Thomas Alexander and Ben Hampton. I am satisfied that two more faithful men to stand under all hardships could not have been found. That night we were called together and organized as a branch. Dan W. Jones, Thomas Alexander and Ben Hampton were chosen to preside, with J. Laty as clerk. The rest of the company was composed of the following names: John Cooper, John Hardcastle, John Shorton, John Chapel, John Galbraith, John Ellis, John Whitaker, William Handy, William Laty, Edwin Sum- mers, Rossiter Jenkins, Elisha Manning, Henry Jakeman George Watt, George Watts and Captain Grant asked about our provisions. I told him they were scant, but as many were suffering and some dying, all we asked was an equal chance with the rest. He told us there would be a lot of worn out cattle left ; to gather them up and try to save them. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. "J T, They consisted mostly of yearlings and two-year-old heifers, some one was taking through. The storm had now ceased to rage and great hopes were felt for a successful move. We were daily expect- ing more help and often wondered why it did not come. Next day all hands pulled out, most of them on foot. After getting my camp regulated a little and giving some instructions, I got on my horse and rode on to see how the train was moving along. All were out of sight when I started. After traveling a few miles, I came upon a lady sitting alone on the side of the road, weeping bitterly. I noticed she was elegantly dressed and appeared strong and well. I asked her what was the matter. She sobbingly replied, "This is too much for me. I have always had plenty, and have never known hardships ; we had a good team and wagon ; my hus- band, if let alone, could have taken me on in comfort. Now I am turned out to walk in this wind and snow. I am determined not to go on but will stay here and die. My husband has gone on and left me, but I will not go another step." The train was two or three miles ahead and moving on. I persuaded her after a while to go on with me. This lady, Mrs. Linforth, and her husband now live in San Francisco, California. They could not stand the hardships of Zion ; but I believe they are friendly to our people. After overtaking the train and seeing them on the move. Captain Grant asked me to go back with instruc- tions for the brethren left with me ; then to come on next day and camp with them over night. On calling the company together at the fort that night, I told them in plain words that if there was a man in camp who could not help eat the last poor animal left 74 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. with US, hides and all, suffer all manner of privations, almost starve to death, that he could go on with me the next day and overtake the trains. No one wanted to go. All voted to take their chances. On taking stock of provisions, we found about twenty day's rations. No salt or bread excepting a few crackers. There w^as at least five months of winter before us and nothing much to eat but a few perishing cattle and w^hat game we might chance to kill. The game was not very certain, as the severe storms had driven everything away. The first move was to fix up the fort. Accordingly Brother Alexander, being a prac- tical man, was appointed to manage the business ; Brother Hampton was to see about the cattle. I followed the train this day to their second encamp- ment and the next day traveled with them. There was much suffering, deaths occurring often. Eph Hanks arrived in camp from the valley and brought word that some of the teams that had reached South Pass and should have met us here, had turned back towards home and tried to persuade Redick Allred, who was left there with a load of flour, to go back with them. The men who did this might have felt justified ; they said it was no use going farther, that we had doubtless all perished. I will not mention their names for it was always looked upon by the company as cowardly in the extreme. If this had not occurred it was the intention of Cap- tain Grant to have sent some one down to us with a load of flour. As it was, by the time any was received, the people were in a starving condition, and could not spare it. From the third camp, where I saw the last of the brethren, an express was sent on to catch the returning supplies and continue on to the valley, giving word that FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 75 the train was coming. I know nothing more of them except from reports. As I am writing mainly from my own observations, I will simply state that after great suf- fering and much assistance (hundreds turning out to help) the emigrants were finally landed in the valley. CHAPTER XIV. We kill our Cattle to keep Them from Wolves — Visit from Two Brethren — Letter from President Young — A Mail Company nearly Perishes. 1LEFT the corripany feeling a little downcast, to return to Devil's Gate. It was pretty well understood that there would be no relief sent us. My hopes were that we could kill game. We had accepted the situation, and as far as Capt. Grant was concerned he had done as much as he could for us. There was more risk for those who went on than for us remaining. On returning to camp, I found that the cattle left were very poor. The weather had moderated and we hoped to get them on good feed and recruit them a little. Over two hundred head of cattle had died in the vicinity of the fort. Along the road each way for a day's travel were carcases. This led droves of prarie wolves into our camp, it was almost impossible to keep them off from the cattle in the day time. We were obliged to corral them at night. Once in the day time a small bunch was taken and run off in spite of the efforts of the herders to stop them. In fact, it became dangerous to 76 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. face these wolves, they were at times almost ready to attack men. We soon found it would be impossible to save the cattle. Already some twenty-five had died or been killed by the wolves within a week. It was decided to kill the rest, some fifty head. A few were in living order, but many would have died within twenty-four hours. In fact we killed them to keep them from dying. We had a first-class butcher from London, who dressed everything in the best style. Everything was saved that we thought might be eaten. We hung the meat up. The poorest of it we did not expect to eat, but intended to use it for wolf bait further along when the carcases were all devoured, provided we could get traps from the Platte bridge, which we afterwards did. We never used our poor beef for wolf bait as we had to eat the whole of it ourselves, and finally the hides were all consumed for food. After killing the cattle we had nothing much to do but fix up the fort and look after four ponies we had left. Brother Hampton and myself had our saddle horses yet in good order. There were plenty of guns and ammunition left with us, also dishes and cooking utensils. After thoroughly repairing the houses, chinking and daubing them, we overhauled the goods stored away. While storing the bales and boxes the snow had drifted in among them. There was nothing but dirt floors and the goods had been tumbled in without any regard to order. Having cleaned out everything, we took ox yokes, of which there were a great many, and made floors of them and then piled the goods on them. While handling ihe goods we found some coffee, sugar and fruit, also a roll of leather. These we kept out and FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 77 put in our store room for use. We also found a box of soap and candles. These goods were marked F. D. Richards, Daniel Spencer, John Van Cott, James Furge- son, William Dunbar, Cyrus Wheelock and Chauncy Webb ; most of them John Van Cott. We were told by Captain Grant to use anything we could find to make us comfortable. During the time we were at a loss what to do, men's minds did not run much upon property, the main interest was to save life. One prominent Elder became very liberal. He had several large trunks filled with valuable stuff. He opened his heart and trunks, making presents to several of the boys from the valley of socks, shirts and such things as would help to make them comfort- able. He left his trunks in my rooms, giving me the keys and telling me to use anything there was, not to suffer for anything that could be found, and asked God to bless me. I told the boys who remained with me that we had better not open this man's trunks, that when he got to the valley and had time to think, he would change his mind and would doubtless be thinking we were using his goods, and if we touched anything belonging to him we would be accused of taking more than we had. Later occurrences proved this to be a good suggestion. With the cattle killed that were fit to eat, and what provisions we had on hand, we managed to live for a while without suffering, except for salt. Bread soon gave out and we lived on meat alone. Some of us went out hunting daily but with poor success. A day or two before Christmas, Ephraim Hanks and Feramorz Little arrived at the fort, bringing the mail from the valley with the following letter of instruc- tions from President Young: 78 forty years among the indians. "President's Office, Great Salt Lake City, ''Dec. 7th, 1856. *' Brothers Jones, Alexander and Hainpton, in charge at Devil s Gate, and the rest of the brethren at that place: "■ Dear Brethren : Quite unexpectedly to us we have the opportunity of sending you a few suggestions, as Judge Smith, the post master here, has concluded to for- ward the eastern mail by Brothers Feramorz Little and Ephraim Hanks. "Being somewhat aware of a natural disposition in many to relax their vigilance after a temporary and unac- customed watchfulness, more especially in case no par- ticular cause of alarm is of frequent occurrence, I feel impressed to write a few suggestions and words of coun- sel to you all. You are in an Indian country, few in number, blockaded by the snows, and far from assistance at this season of the year. Under such circumstances you can but realize the necessity of all of you being con- stantly on the alert, to be firm, steady, sober-minded and sober-bodied, united, faithful and watchful, living your religion. Do not go from your fort in small parties of one, two or three at a time. But when game is to be sought, wood got up, or any other operation to be performed re- quiring you to travel from under the protection of the fort guns, go in bands of some ten or twelve together, and let them be well armed ; and let those who stay by the stuff be watchful while their comrades are out. And at all times and under all circumstances let every person have his arms and ammunitions ready for active service at a moment's warning, so you cannot be surprised by your foes nor in any way be taken advantage of, whether in or out of the fort. Always have plenty of water about the buildings, and be very careful about fires, and the preservation from damp, fire or other damage of the goods in your care. Unless buffaloes and other game come within a reasonable distance, you had better kill some of the cattle than run much risk in quest of game. Use all due diligence for the preservation of your stock. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 79 and try to so ration out your flour as to have it last until we can send you relief, which, as before stated, will be forwarded as early as possible in the spring, but may not reach you until May, depending somewhat on the winter snows and spring weather, of which you will be able to form an estimate as the season advances. "We will send teams to your relief as early as pos- sible in the spring, and trust to learn that all has been well with you and the property in your care. Brothers Little and Hanks will furnish you with items of news from the valley, and I will forward you some packages of our papers by them. " Praying you may be united, faithful and protected, ''I remain, Yojjr brother in the gospel, '' Brigham Young." From this letter it is plain to see that Brother Brig- ham was not apprised of our condition. He afterwards said if he had known our situation he would have relieved us if it had taken half the men in the valley. I never felt to complain. The brethren who left us knew but little about what was left to provision us. The sup- position was that the cattle would have furnished us in case game could not be killed. Brother Alexander and I were out for several days, killing some game on this trip. We were much disap- pointed on our return to find that Brothers Hanks and Little had gone on east without us seeing them. Brother Little looked around at our supplies, telling the boys to take care of the hides, that they were better than nothing to eat. This proved good advice. Soon after, the Magraw mail company 'came along under the charge of Jesse Jones. They left their coaches, fitted up with packs and started for the valley. Brother Joseph L. Heywood, United States Marshal for Utah, was a passenger. They went as far as the South 8o FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. Pass. The storm setting in so severely they could not face it, they came near freezing to death ; it was with great difficulty that Brother Heywood was kept alive. The day they returned to our camp we had killed a buffalo some twelve miles distant, it took all hands three days to get it into camp. This buffalo I shot at the risk of my life. He was coming toward me in a snow trail. I lay on the trail with nothing to protect me. If I had not killed him he would doubtless have run on to me ; but he dropped at the first shot. We were about out of anything fit to eat and it did not require much bravery to take the risk^ for almost anyone will take desperate chances when hungry. We wounded two others, that we expected to get, but about the time we commenced dressing the one killed, there came on a regular blizzard that lasted several days. We had hard work to save the lives of the men getting the meat into camp. CHAPTER XV. Our Food Exhausted — Rawhides Cooked and Eaten — Our Fast- Day — An unexpected Supper — A providental Food Supply. THE MAIL company went down fifty miles to Platte bridge to winter. Marshal Heywood decided to remain with us and live or die, as the case might be, pre- ferring to be with his brethren. There were no provi- sions to be had at the Bridge, for three of us had been down to see if we could get supplies. We barely got enough to last us back. The mountaineers there had some cattle but no bread, they lived by hunting. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 8-1 Game soon became so scarce that we could kill nothing. We ate all the poor meat; one would get hungry eating it. Finally that was all gone, nothing now but hides were left. We made a trial of them. A lot was cooked and eaten without any seasoning and it made the whole company sick. Many were so turned against the stuff that it made them sick to think of it. We had coffee and some sugar, but drinking coffee seemed to only destroy the appetite, and stimulate for only a little while. One man became delirious from drinking so much of it. Things looked dark, for nothing remained but the poor raw hides taken from starved cattle. We asked the Lord to direct us what to do. The brethren did not murmur, but felt to trust in God. We had cooked the hide, after soaking and scraping the hair off until it was soft and then ate it, glue and all. This made it rather inclined to stay with us longer than we desired. Finally I was impressed how to fix the stuff and gave the com- pany advice, telling them how to cook it ; for them to scorch and scrape the hair off ; this had a tendency to kill and purify the bad taste that scalding gave it. After scraping, boil one hour in plenty of water, throwing the water away which had extracted all the glue, then wash and scrape the hide thoroughly, washing in cold water, then boil to a jelly and let it get cold, and then eat with a little sugar sprinkled on it. This was considerable trouble, but we had litde else to do and it was better than starving. We asked the Lord to bless our stomachs and adapt them to this* food. We hadn't the faith to ask him to bless the raw-hide for it was ''hard stock." On eating now all seemed to relish the feast. We were 82 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. three days without eating before this second attempt was made. We enjoyed this sumptuous fare for about six weeks, and never had the gout. In February the first Indian came to our camp. He was of the Snake tribe, his people were located a day's travel up the river. At the time of his arrival we were out of everything, having not only eaten the hides taken from cattle killed, but had eaten the wrappings from the wagon-tongues, old moccasin-soles were eaten also, and a piece of buffalo hide that had been used for a foot mat for two months. The day the Indian came was fast-day, and for us fast-day in very truth. We met as usual for we kept our monthly fast-day. During meeting we became im- pressed that there were some wrongs existing among the brethren in camp that should be corrected; and that if we would make a general cleaning up, and present our case before the Lord, He would take care of us, for we were there on His business. On questioning some of the company privately, we found that several had goods in their possession not belonging to them. When we felt satisfied all goods were replaced we went en masse and cut a hole in the ice on the river. There were several carcasses of cattle that had died lying near the fort, that the wolves had not devoured. Some of the boys, contrary to counsel, had cut steaks from them during the time we were eating the hides ; it made them quite sick. There was a pile of offal in the butcher shop from the poor cattle killed. But what looked more tempting than all to starving men was a pile of more than one hundred fat wolf carcasses, skinned, piled up and frozen near the fort. They looked very much like nice fat mutton. Many of the company asked my opinion about eating them. I told them if they would all do as I FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. ' 83 advised we would have a good clean supper of healthy food ; that these carcasses were unclean ; that we were on the Lord's service, and did not believe He wanted us to suffer so much, if we only had faith to trust Him and ask for better. We all became united in this feeling. Accordingly we hauled all these carcasses of cattle, the wolves, also the offal from the store-house and shoved them into the hole cut in the ice, where they floated off out of our reach. We then went and washed out our store-house and presented it before the Lord empty, but clean. Near sundown the Indian spoken of came to our quarters. Some of the boys hunted up a small piece of raw hide and gave it to him. He said he had eaten it before. None of us were able to talk much with him ; we invited him to remain with us over night. Evening came on and no supper;, eight o'clock, no word from any one. And the word had been positively given that we should have supper. Between eight and nine o'clock all were sitting waiting, now and then good-natur- edly saying it was most suppertime. No one seemed disheartened. Bro. Heywood was still with us. All at once we heard a strange noise resembling human voices down the road. Bro. Heywood rushed out exclaiming, '' Here comes our supper." The voices were loud and in an unknown tongue. Bro. H. came back a little frightened saying there was something strange going on down the road. Several of us, taking our arms, started in the direction of the noise. On getting nearer we recognized the voices. The Magraw party under Jesse Jones was making another effort to get through with their coaches ; they had got stuck in a snow drift and the noise we heard was Canadian Frenchmen swearing at their mules. 84 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIA?iS. We helped them out and guided them into the fort. It was a bitter cold night but we had good houses with rousing fires. ' After unhitching and turning out Jesse said, "I am glad to get here." I replied, " I am as glad to see you." ''Why are you so glad to see us?" he asked. I told him we had not a mouthful of anything to eat, nor had we tasted food that day. " Then what are you stopping here for?" I replied, "We were waiting for you to bring our supper." He laughed and said, " Well you shall have it if it takes the last bite we have got." He gave to vour cook all of his provisions. About ten o'clock twenty-six hungry men sat down to about as thankfully a received supper as was ever partaken of by mortal man. In January when this party passed through to Platte bridge, I sent word by them to the mountaineers there that we would pay a good price for meat brought to us. Two of the best hunters, Messrs. Maxim and Plant, made the attempt to get us meat, but failed, almost starving themselves on the hunt. They never reached our fort but returned to their homes on the Platte. When Jesse Jones left us going down we had but little provisions on hand. Maxim and Plant's failure to reach us with food caused the people at Platte bridge to suppose we had all perished. Jesse told me he fully expected to find our skeletons. Some may ask why we did not leave. There was no time during the winter but what the attempt would have been certain death to some of us. The company at no time was strong enough to make the trip to Platte bridge, neither did we wish to abandon our trust that we had accepted with our eyes wide open to the perils around us. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 85 After supper we found there was scarcely enough left for breakfast. Jesse asked what we proposed doing. One of the mail company, a Frenchman, commenced talking with the Indian explaining our situation to him. He said their camp was also out of meat ; that they were hungry, and that he was out prospecting for game, as there was none in the neighborhood of their camp ; but he thought he could find game next day if some one would go with him to protect him from the Crow Indians, who were supposed to be in the direction of the game. This seemed the only show, so Jesse decided to " lay over " and send out his hunter with some pack animals ; also ten of our company, the stoutest and most willing. They, no doubt, would have fought the whole Crow nation to have protected our Indian friend. Late that evening the Frenchman and Indian came into the fort with their animals loaded with good buffalo meat. I asked about the boys of our company who went out on foot. The Frenchman answered, " I left them about twenty-five miles from here roasting and eat- ing bones and entrails; they are all right." They got in next day, each man loaded with meat. They were all delighted with the Indian, telling how he killed the buf- falo with his arrows, the Frenchman shooting first and wounding the animal and the Indian doing the rest. These Indians of the plains years back killed a great many buffalo with arrows. They would stick two arrows into a buffalo's heart, crossing their direction so that as the buffalo ran these arrows would work and cut his heart almost in two. This would soon bring the poor brute down ; whereas with a single arrow in the heart they would run a long distance. 86 FOKTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. CHAPTER XVI. Kindness of Indians in Providing Food — Express from Salt Lake City — Visit from an Indian Chief — Scanty Food Supply. THE mail company again fitted up with packs, leaving their coaches. They took Brother Hey wood with them. This time making the trip successfully. They left all the meat they could spare, taking only scant rations with them. Brother Heywood, although very weak in body, manifested the spirit of a hero during the whole time of our suffering. I have always remembered him with the kindest of feelings. As he sometimes remarks, "rawhide makes a strong tie." The Indian went away saying he would tell his peo- ple about us, and if they could find any meat they would divide. It did not take long for twenty hungry men to eat up our supplies. About the 4th of March the last mor- sel had been eaten for breakfast. We went hunting daily, sometimes killing a little small game, but nothing of account. Our provisions were exhausted and we had cleaned up everything before Jesse Jones came to our relief We were now in a tight place. There was a set of harness and an old pack saddle covered with rawhide still on hand, that some of the boys considered safe to depend upon for a few days, still we had great hopes of getting something better. Our faith had been much strengthened by receiving the supplies mentioned. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 87 As usual we went out to see what we could find in the way of game. After traveling through the snow for several miles at the foot of the mountains, we saw a drove of mountain sheep. They were standing, seem- ingly entirely off their guard. I was in front and saw the sheep, as I supposed before they did me. We dodged down out of sight. I crept to a large rock, fully expecting to get meat. When I looked to get a shot the game was gone, I could see it making for the top of the mountain. We watched them for a minute or two and they were soon too far for us to follow. My heart almost failed me, and I could have cried like a child, for I knew that nothing was in camp when we left and our comrades expected us to bring something for supper. We were convinced that nothing could be obtained this day by hunting, so we started for home. After traveling a few miles we struck the road below Devil's Gate and here we stopped to hold a council. As will be remembered, our instructions from Brother Brigham were never to leave the fort with less than ten men. There never had been a time when we had that many men able to stand very hard service. Sometimes I felt like disregarding counsel and going out to try to get food, or perish in the attempt. But up to this time we had all followed instructions as nearly as possible. Now here was a trial for me. I firmly believed I could go on foot to Platte bridge and get something to save the lives of my comrades. Very few of the others were able, but all were willing to go with me. I told them if counsel had to be broken I would risk no one but myself, and would go alone. The boys thought they could live five days before starving. So it was arranged that I should start alone next morning for the Platte bridge. I had now been one day without food, it would SS FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. take two more to reach the bridge, where there were traders, as the snow was from eighteen inches to three feet deep. This looked a little hard, but I had fully made up my mind to try it. On arriving in sight of camp we saw a number of horses ; we knew some one had arrived but had no idea who it was. A shout of joy rang out from our crowd that made the hills ring. All mankind were friends to us then. I often wonder why people are enemies. My experience in life, with a few exceptions, has been more of the friendly than warlike nature. I have been fed and helped by all classes of people, and mankind in gen- eral are not so bad when properly approached. The new arrivals proved to be the first company of the Y. X. Express, with William Hickman in charge. This was the first effort of this firm to send the mail through. Several old acq,uaintances were along, and of course we were rejoiced to see them, especially so when we learned they had a good supper for us. Among the party were George Boyd of Salt Lake City and Joshua Terry of Draperville. A day or two before their arrival Brother Terry had killed a large buffalo and they packed the whole of it into our camp. I remember about the first thing I did after shaking hands, was to drink a pint of strong salty broth, where some salt pork had been boiled. When Hickman's company arrived, some of our boys were getting the pack saddle soaked up ready for cooking the hide covering. Boyd always calls me the man that ate the pack saddle. But this is slander. The kindness of him and others prevented me from eating my part of it. I think if they had not arrived, probably FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 89 I would have taken a wing or leg, but don't think I would have eaten the whole of it. As it was, the saddle was allowed to dry up again, and may be in existence yet and doing well so far as I know. In Hickman's book he says he found us starving with plenty of provisions in store houses, but did not dare to take them ; that on his arrival he burst open the store houses and told us to help ourselves. Can anyone believe such stuff ? If all his book is like this for truth, one would do well to believe the reverse. Hickman left about the 6th of March, going on east. Ben Hampton and myself started to go on to Platte bridge with this party, intending to get some supplies if possible. Hickman left us two animals and with one of ours (the other three had long since been eaten by the wolves) found nearby we felt ourselves rich. We had gone but a few miles when we met some men from the Platte bringing us some beef. They had heard in some way that we were still alive. I think the Indians must have passed the word. They could not get buffalo meat, so had killed some cattle and were bringing them to us. They had been four days on the road, tramping snow and working through drifts, expecting to find us starving. I often think of these old pioneers, who were always so ready to help a fellow- man in need. We bade good-by to Hickman and party and re- turned to the fort with the meat. We paid for it in goods from Brother Van Cott's boxes, paying mostly calico and domestic. They charged us ten cents per pound, which was very cheap considering. With our animals and meat we felt quite well fitted out ; for we had now become so used to taking what we 90 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. could get thankfully, that we looked upon these two mules left us as sure food when all else failed. While Jesse Jones was in camp, one of his men gave me a small book of words in the Snake language. I expected the Indians around and studied hard every day. Soon they commenced coming in to see us. There were over one hundred lodges of Snakes and Bannocks came in from the Wind river country and camped about fifteen miles from us. Small bands camped around us in different directions. They soon learned we were short of provisions. The first party that brought meat to us wanted to charge an unreasonable price for it. I talked with them quite a while before they would consent to sell it cheaper. They said that they themselves were hungry, showing us their bare arms, how lean they were. But I told them it was not just to take advantage of our cir- cumstances. I weighed up a dollar's worth of meat on a pair of spring balances, marked the scales plainly and told them I would give no more. They consented, and we bought hundreds of pounds afterwards without more trouble. In buying we had to weigh one dollar's worth at a time, no matter how much they sold us. We exchanged various articles with them, many of the company trading shirts, handkerchiefs and such things as they could spare. We had some coffee, for which the Indians traded readily. This helped us out for a short season ; but game became so scarce that this camp of natives (several hundred) had to move out or starve. They came up the first day and pitched their lodges near us. We had but little provisions on hand, some meat and a few pounds of flour that we used to thicken our broth was all. We had about lost our appetite for bread. We were a Httle uneasy to have all these hungry FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 9 1 Indians come upon us at once ; the greatest care had ta be taken to avoid trouble. They were not of the best class, being a party made up of Snakes and Bannocks, who had left their regular tribes and chiefs and joined together under an ambitious young fellow named Tabawantooa. Washakie, the old Snake chief, called them bad men. There was one little party under an old petty chief, Toquatah, who kept apart from the main band. Fron> them we had procured most of our meat. Toquatah had informed us that the main band and his were not on the best of terms, and that Tabawantooa was ''no good."^ This naturally made us feel a little uneasy. We had some two hundred wagon loads of valuable goods under our charge, and only twenty men, the greater portion of them with no frontier experience. The store rooms were blocked up with logs, and had been all winter. By this time I could talk considerable Snake and many of these Indians understood Ute. Tabawantooa and his band came in sight of our quarters about noon. They were all mounted and well armed. The chief with many others rode up in quite a pompous style, no doubt expecting to be looked upon with awe and treated with great deference. I had time to get my wits together before they got to our gate where an armed guard was stationed. Brother Alexander was to be chief cook. Knowing that from such as we had we would have to make a great showing of hospitality, we concluded to make up in ceremony what was lacking in food. So all the camp-kettles and coffee-pots were filled and put on. The one for weak soup the other for strong coffee. We had plenty of the latter on hand. 92 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. The company were instructed to go into their rooms, shut the doors, keep quiet, and not to show themselves unless ordered to do so. Brother Hampton was to be general roust-a-bout, ready for any emergency ; I was to meet these Indians outside and invite them in the gate, as we knew the chief and grandees of the band would expect to be entertained. Soon the chief with some fifty others rode up to the fort, while hundreds more passed on a short distance and commenced to put up their lodges. I met the chief, shook hands, and asked him to get down and come in. He wanted to know if they could not ride inside. I told him no, and explained to him that we had a lot of men in the fort who were afraid of Indians ; that they had gone into their houses and shut the doors ; but the door of my house was open for them, but that these men, who were afraid, should not be frightened ; they must leave their horses and arms outside the fort. This the chief agreed to do and appointed a man to see that no one came in with arms. Soon my room was full. I explained to the chief that we had but little to eat and could not entertain many ; but half we had they were welcome to. I talked and acted as though we were glad to see them, still I, with all my friendship for Indians, would have been willing for this band to have taken another road. Brother Alexander soon had plenty of weak soup and strong coffee ready; cups were filled and the feast commenced. The chief sent word for those outside to go on to camp, probably seeing his rations would be short if many more came in. Brother Hampton kept his eye on things in general and would come in and report from time to time. All except one respected our arrangements. Indians, like FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 93 white men, have their bullies. One fellow in spite of the guards rode into fort armed. Brother Hampton took his horse by the bit, and guided him back out of the gate. He was quite saucy but went out all right. We were asked how many men were in the houses. I told them shouts (great many). They then wanted to know if the men had guns. We told them ''lots," which was a fact as there were more guns than men. Indians, when hungry relish anything that tightens their belts, so our friends filled and emptied their cups many times. Soon all who had remained were satisfied, bade us good-by, mounted their horses and started to their camp, the chief inviting us to go up and take supper with him. Went up late in the day. Some coffee had been given the chief and at supper we feasted on poor antelope meat and coffee. We were told that but one antelope had been killed that day and the chief had been presented with it. The whole camp were about out of food except thistle roots. These were not very plentiful, as we had already dug and eaten the most that could be found for miles around our quarters. These natives moved on next morning. Toquatah's band being still in the rear. In a day or two the last band came along and camped near us. We were glad to see them and wanted them to remain near us, but they were afraid of the Crow Indians and desired to keep in the vicinity of the larger band for protection against their common enemy. We explained to them our destitute condition, telling them that we were again about out of provisions, and would be sorry to have them leave, for while they were near they had never let us suffer for meat. Next morning the old chief said he would go out •94 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. twelve miles to a gap in the mountains and camp, and if he could find any game he would let us have some dried meat he had reserved. We waited a day and then went to see if our friends were prospered. Nothing had been found. Ten of us stayed all night with the Indians and we barely got enough for supper and breakfast. The chief told us to go back home ; he would move on a little farther ; if he found anything he would send it to us. His spirit towards us was something like a mother's with a lot of hungry children. Now some might ask why we did not do our own hunting and not depend on the Indians. An Indian will manage to kill game where it is so scarce and wild that l>ut few white men would even see it. We were much safer to depend upon the Indians as long as they were around in the country. Again, they considered it their business to hunt, and if we had made the attempt it would have been resented by them. We went home feeling a little sad. We had our animals, but did not wish to kill them ; still we felt safe as long as mule flesh was on hand. To our joy, next day some Indians came from their camp, bringing us some three hundred pounds of buflalo meat and inform- ing us that they had seen signs of game ; and if we would come to them the next morning, they might let us have some more. Brother Hampton and I saddled up taking our extra animal, a large mule, and started for our friends. The weather was still cold, but the snow was mostly gone from the lowlands, it being now near the first of April. When we arrived at their camp the Indians were just starting out to move a few miles further towards where the signs of buffalo had been seen. Brother H. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 95 and I rode along with them, chatting with the old chief. We had taken a few things with us to trade for the meat. We camped in the afternoon some thirty miles from home. The old chief called out and soon the squaws commen4:ed bringing in a few pounds each of good dried meat. We traded for about three hundred pounds — all our mule could pack and about all the Indians could spare. This, of course, was all we could expect, but the old chief said maybe they could do more for us in the morning. I think Brother Hampton and I really enjoyed our- selves that night. We slept in a lodge, ate meat, and drank coffee. The squaws' dirt, or dogs sticking their noses into the meat dishes, made no difference to us ; or If it did we ate all the same. Next morning after breakfast, we saddled up, pack- ing our dried meat on the mule. As we were about ready to start there was quite a commotion in camp. We thought at first the Crow Indians were upon us, but the old chief, looking in an easterly direction said, *Tt is some of the young men driving a buffalo. Now good-by.. You go on your road (our track was to the north) and you will find some more meat ready for you soon." We started and had gone but a short distance, probably three miles, when we found the bufTalo that was being chased had been run into our trail, killed and made ready to deliver to us. .We gave them some few things we had left and they loaded both of our saddle animals. This left us nearly thirty miles to go afoot. We did not mind this on the start, but did before we got liome. 96 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. CHAPTER XVII. My Severe Toil in Getting to Camp — Three Stray Cattle Come to the Fort — The Second Company of the Y. X. Express Passes us — Our Hunt for the Cattle — Two Days' Travel Without Food— Our Safe Return to Camp. I HAD been wearing moccasins all winter, had done a great deal of walking and had felt well and strong ; but the winter had commenced to break and there was mud and wet snow to encounter on our trip. Someone had induced me to put on a pair of heavy, stiff-soled English shoes. About sundown I gave out; got so lame that it was impossible for me to wear the shoes and travel. We had about ten miles to go yet, and no trail, as the Indian trail was much longer than to cross directly over the country, and we wished to take the shortest cut. Moreover there was still a few inches of snow on the ground part of the way on the most direct route. We were bent on getting to camp that night, if pos- sible, so determined to keep going. I was compelled to pull off my "stoggas" and go in my stocking feet. This did very well till the snow gave out, which it did as we got on to lower country. My socks soon failed then, and the ground commenced to freeze hard. Traveling became slightly unpleasant to me. I put on the shoes again, but could not possibly walk ; it was as though my shin bones were being broken at every step. (Some may wonder why my companion did not change his foot gear with me. The reason was he wore a number six shoe, and I could squeeze on a number ten. Will that do?) So I determined to go bare-footed. It now became really unpleasant, for the country was spotted with prickly FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 97 pears (thorny cactus). When I placed my number ten foot, pressed down by my 175-pound body, on these desert ornaments, they had a piercing effect, often caus- ing me to halt. Several times it hurt so badly that I dropped, desiring to take a seat so that I could pull the thorns out of my feet, but on striking the ground I had a sudden desire to rise, as the cactus formed the only place to sit. This was really amusing. Still, I soon had enough of this fun and commenced to figure how to avoid having any more of it. The horses dreaded the cactus, and if left to pick the road would avoid them ; so we allowed them to go ahead. I carefully watched their tracks and followed them, getting along much better after this. About midnight we got in, my feet a little the worse for wear ; but so happy were we with our success that my feet soon got well. Another blessing had befallen the company while we were gone. Three large work oxen, one wearing a big bell, had come into camp. These cattle had traveled nearly one hundred miles from where they had been lost ; they were in fair order. We supposed the reason why the wolves had not killed them was that the noise of the bell scared them away. With the meat on hand and these cattle we felt pretty safe for the balance of the season. We had hopes of keeping a yoke of the cattle to haul wood with, this having been done all winter with a light wagon, ten men for team, or in hand-carts. The ice was melted on the river and in going for wood it had to be waded. This was hard on the boys, and we were very grateful for the cattle. About this time the second company of the Y. X. express, under Jet Stoddard, passed down. They had 98 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. but little to Spare us, but we were now out of danger. We got a little flour, salt and bacon. The word was that the next company would bring us flour. The most of us had got so we cared but little for bread if we could have plenty of meat. Our cattle were our pets now. We hauled up a lot of wood. The grass being quite good off toward the east, the cattle were taken out every day. At night someone went and brought them in and corraled them. Our horses were hoppled in sight of camp, where they ran day and night. One evening the boys who went for the oxen came in rather late without them, saying that they could not hear the bell. We supposed they had laid down for the night ; still, we were anxious, as our meat was about out and we expected to soon butcher the fattest of them. Early next morning Brother Hampton and I saddled up and started out before breakfast to hunt the cattle, not expecting to be gone more than an hour. We soon struck their trail going east, most of the time showing they were on the move, not often feeding. At sundown we were about thirty miles from camp, still trailing and tolerably hungry ; but that trail could not be left. We followed on, the tracks running almost parallel with the road but gradually nearing it. It now became too dark to see the trail. We were continually expecting to hear the bell, but no bell sounded. We continued in the same direction until we reached the main road. After following it a short distance Brother Hampton dismounted and felt for tracks. He soon decided that the cattle were now on the road as he could feel the tracks where the ground had been lately disturbed, the road being dry and soft in places. Thus we continued to travel for some four or five miles feeling for tracks. At length we came to a FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 99 gulch crossing the road, several feet deep and full of snow. We could see where the cattle had crossed as the moon was now up and we could trail quite well ; but on attempting to cross the drift, we sank down. At this season of the year these snow-drifts freeze in the night time, thawing out in the afternoon and gradually melting away so that from noon until after midnight it is impos- sible for a horse to cross them ; men often crossing on hands and knees, or if the snow is quite soft lying down and rolling across. This we could have done but our horses did not feel as anxious as we did to go on ; so when we proposed to them to roll across the drift, they pretended not to understand us. We followed up the drift for quite a distance, but it remained the same white streak of snow as far as we could see by moonlight, so we concluded to turn in until morning when the snow would be hardened. It was now getting quite chilly, we had eaten nothing all day, all the bedding we had was a couple of small saddle blankets, and there was nothing to make a fire with but a little green sagebrush. But if there had been fuel we would have been afraid to light a fire as the Crow Indians were in the country and might steal our horses. We went to "ground" but did not sleep much. It soon became so cold that we almost froze to death. When we thought the snow was hard enough we got up, but were so chilled we could not saddle our horses. We were almost lifeless, and commenced stirring about to bring life back. We commenced bumping against each other, sometimes knocking one another down. We got to laughing at the ridiculousness of our actions, more life returned, our teeth began chattering and our bodies shaking, but we kept up this jostling each other until we started circulation and were able to saddle up and go on. ICX) FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. It was daylight before we got thawed out. We walked until we got well warmed up the trail following right on the road. About ten o'clock a. m. we found the cattle. They had finally turned off the road to feed. We were now about forty-five miles from home. The first thing I pro- posed after finding the cattle was to cut their tails off, tie a string around the stubs to keep them from bleed- ing, roast the tails and eat them, for I felt wolfish. Ben objected, saying it might weaken the cattle and that he believed we could stand it back home ; that the cattle were good travelers and may be we could reach the fort by midnight. Our horses (or rather, horse and mule. As I will soon have to deal a little with a mule it will not do to call him a horse now) were all right, having been on good feed the night before. The cattle, on being turned back, took the road in good shape, starting on a trot. We were anxious to get back and cross the snow- drift before it softened up. This we succeeded in doing, and continued traveling until after noon before "bating." We had more sympathy for ourselves than for our ani- mals, for we were getting a little hungry and dreaded the thought of having to "go to ground " again. So we kept up our speed. Finally Ben's mule began to weaken. We had considerable trouble to get it along, but by one leading and the other walking and whipping we got to Independence Rock, where there were three or four men camped in some old houses. This was about six miles from our fort. Here we had a trial I think few men would have stood. As we rode up they had a good fire burning, a nice supper cooked and were just ready to commence eating. They had stayed the night before at our camp where FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. lOI they4iad arrived destitute and out of provisions. Brother Alexander had told them about us. Our company was very anxious about us. They had given these poor fel- lows what provisions they could spare, enough to last them to Platte bridge provided they made the trip in rea- sonable time. One of the party had frozen his feet and was suffering terribly. We soon learned their condition, but they insisted on us eating supper. We thought of the poor lame fellow getting out of food ; we were within six miles of home so we pretended that we were not very hungry, and advised them to be careful of what they had and we would go on home. The smell of the food to us was like piercing our stomachs with a dagger. It was really hard to refuse taking a few bites, but we did. When we had got about half way home I went ahead with the cattle, Ben driving the tired mule. I wished to get in and have supper ready by the time my comrade arrived, which I did not suppose would be over one half hour. On arriving at the fort, most of the company were up waiting in suspense our arrival. Brother Alexander had a camp kettle full of meat and soup with dumplings ready. It was rations for seven men. He had kept it warm all day, and com- menced to dish some up for me, but I told him that I would not eat a bite until Ben came. It was more than an hour before he arrived, the give-out mule having broken loose and ran away from him and he had been following it. Finally he arrived, bringing the mule and feeling very much like beefing it when he got home. All now was ready for our supper. We sat down on some wolf skins before the fire, the camp-kettle in reach, and commenced to eat, but not hurriedly. Before daylight we had emptied the kettle. We relished this I02 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. feast fully and did not suffer any inconvenience. Both of us were well and feeling first rate next day after hav- ing a good sleep. As the cattle were so much bother we concluded to kill them. CHAPTER XVIII. Pulling Sticks — "Rawhide Against Corn" — Our Buffalo Hunt — Dissatisfaction at the Food Rations — Permission Given to eat All that was Wanted — Ben Hampton's Prophecy — Its Fulfillment — A Relief Party Arrives — Tom Williams' Party of Apostates — He Demands Goods Under our Care but does not get Them. ABOUT this time another Y. X. company, under Por- ter Rockwell and John Murdock, arrived going east. They gave us a little flour and other provisions ; they also brought us letters telling us when the relief train would arrive. With the three head of cattle and what this company furnished us, we felt safe for supplies until time for the relief trains. Here I will give an account of a little personal mat- ter that may seem like boasting, but I do not intend it so. This company stayed with us two nights. They were picked men, thirty in number, able-bodied, tough boys. On hearing of our sufferings many remarks were made showing deep sympathy for us. At this time we were well recruited, having had plenty of meat for some time but scarcely any flour for some five months. Bread we had hardly tasted. In fact, the first biscuit I got almost choked me, I had entirely lost my appetite for it. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. IO3 The morning the Y. X. company were getting ready to start on, a young man, Mr. Eldredge^ who was going down as a passenger, expressed much indignation, say- ing that there could be no excuse for leaving men to suffer as we had. I did not like to hear this said, for I knew there were justifiable reasons for leaving us to take care of the goods. I also knew brothers Grant and Burton would have sent us help if they could. It was expected that the cattle left would have been better beef than they turned out to be. I had neither time nor disposition to explain all these things, so to stop the talk that I had got a little tired of hearing, I said to Mr. Eldredge, "We do not need your sympathy; we are all right now ; none of us have died, and I am a better man than any of your com- pany, picked men as you are." ''How do you propose to prove this, Mr. Jones? Will you pull sticks with our best man? I will not allow you rawhide-£ed fellows to banter the corn-fed boys that way." I was a little fearful that I was "sold," for I knew there were some stout men in their cornpany ; but as the banter was made, to back out would be worse than to get beat, so I said, "Bring him on; I will hoist him." Mr. Eldredge came back with John Murdock, who was smiling. Now I really wished I had not made the banter, for John was an old friend who was hard to pull up. A ring was formed, both companies helping to form a circle. "Rawhide against corn" was the cry. We sat down and got an even start. It was a hard pull, but "Rawhide" won, and we got no more pity from that company. Making a close estimate of the food we now had, I04 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. we found it would last us till the promised provisions could arrive, which would be about the ist of May. There were twenty of us now. We quit ration- ing and ate all we wanted. As may be imagined, some big eating was done. Now the food soon began to diminish very fast. At this time we could go to the Platte bridge and get provisions, but on calling the com- pany together all hands agreed to make the meat last by again rationing. We could do this quite easily, allowing one and a half pounds per day. We lived a few days on these rations and all seemed content. One day Brother Hampton and I were out and on returning to the fort we learned that a small herd of buf- falo had been seen passing within three miles of the fort. All hands were excited, as they were the first seen for a long time. The boys were all sure that Ben and I could get meat and we could again go to feasting. We started out and soon came in sight of the buffalo feeding. We dismounted and crept close to them, but just as we got in shooting distance it commenced to snow so hard that we could not see to shoot with any certainty. We sat there trying to get sight of a buffalo until our fingers were too much benumbed to hold our guns. I had brought an extra gun in anticipation of having to chase the buffalo on horseback. We concluded to blaze away, hit or miss, and then take to our horses and have a run- ning shot. At the crack of our guns all the herd ran away. We mounted and started in pursuit. The horse I was riding could easily outrun the buf- falo, but for the life of me I could not get him up along side of one. When I would follow straight behind he would get within about twenty-five yards, but when I would try to get him up nearer he would bolt and run off to one side. This game we kept up for some time. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. IO5 Occasionally the buffalo would get two or three hundred yards away from me, when the horse would start in after them and soon run up to about the same distance, then he would bolt again. I felt almost like blowing his brains out. I finally commenced shooting at the buffalo, but to no purpose. As none were killed we had to give up the chase and go home without meat, feeling quite cha- grined. We had not been in camp long until I was informed that there was a great dissatisfaction being manifested by some of the company about the rations. I im- mediately called the company together to see what was the trouble. Several expressed themselves quite freely, finding fault for being rationed when provisions could now be had, and saying that they thought I ought to go and get something to eat and not have them suffer any more. This grieved me very much as I had a kindly feeling towards all the company. We had suffered every- thing that men could suffer and live. We had often been on the point of starvation. Sometimes becoming so weak that we could scarcely get our firewood, having to go some distance to the mountain for it. We were now all in good health and had, as I understood, willingly agreed to be rationed for a few days, until relief came from Salt Lake City. I did not care so much for the trouble of going for provisions, but I felt a great deal of pride in the grit of the company and this was a sore disappointment for me, for no one had just reason to find fault. All I said was, '' Well, brethren, I will go and get you all you want. Now pitch in and eat your fill. I will have more by the time you eat up what is on hand." Brother Hampton felt very indignant at the fault- finders. He told them that they would soon be ashamed of themselves ; spoke of the hardships we had endured I06 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. uncomplainingly, and of the hard labors in hunting, and many efforts made to keep alive. Now when we were about through and no one suffering, some had shown their true colors, and marred their credit for being true men. Ben got warm and finally said, '' You will regret this. Instead of having to wait twelve days there will be plenty of provisions here inside of twelve hours, and then you will wish you had kept still." At this he ceased talking, sat down and turned to me saying a little ex- citedly, '' What do think ? Will it come ? " I said " Yes," for I felt the prophecy would be fulfilled. Sure enough that same evening twenty men arrived at our camp bringing nearly a ton of flour and other provisions. This company had been sent to strengthen our post. They informed us that there was a large company of apostates on the road led by Tom S. Williams. Before leaving Salt Lake some of this company had made threats that indicated danger to us. The circumstances leading to the threats were these. The goods we were guarding belonged to the last season's emigrants. The wagon companies freighting them through agreed to deliver them in Salt Lake City. These goods were to be taken in and delivered as by contract. Some of the owners had become dissatisfied with ** Mormonism " and were going back to the States. As their goods had not arrived in Salt Lake City, they demanded that they should be delivered at Devil's Gate. Quite a number settled their freight bills and brought orders for their goods and received them all right. Others refused to settle, but threatened that if the goods were not given up they would take them by force. Tom Williams' company was composed largely of this class and their backers. They numbered about fifty men. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. I07 The twenty men coming to our relief were sent under the emergency. This is the way Brother Hampton's prophecy came to be fulfilled. Tom Williams knew nothing of this company, as they had slipped out and got ahead of him and arrived long enough before fhim for us to get everything ready. We now had forty men well armed, the twenty sent us being picked for the occasion. As I cannot remember all their names I will simply say for the purpose they were all first-class men. Our old company were reliable. As Ben had said they would be, they were a little ashamed, but nothing farther was said, and the boys showed their repentance by doing their duties now. Our instructions were to deliver no goods to any- one unless they presented an order from the right parties. When Williams' company arrived they made camp near our fort. Most of our men were kept out of sight. There were rooms each side of the front door, where we had a guard placed. A person that claimed a lot of goods had come on the evening before and presented an order that was not genuine. He had reported to his friends our refusing to let him have his goods. Soon Williams and a few others came up and said if we did not give up the goods that they would tear down the fort or have them. Wil- liams was well known to most of us ; by marriage he was my wife's uncle. I informed him that we intended to obey instructions. He raved and threatened consider- able, but to no purpose. He started to his camp with the avowed intention of returning and taking the goods. I now got my company ready for fight if necessary We had prepared port holes in front of the fort and here I stationed some of the best shots. Brothers Hampton and Alexander took charge of our I08 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. company. The company that came to strengthen us working together under their leader. Soon we saw Tom WilHams approaching with his backers. As he supposed double our number, but in reality near the same. I did not wish blood shed, and fully believed that Tom was playing a ''bluff," so concluded to try and beat him at the game. I instructed some of the best marksmen what to do in case shooting had to be done. As Williams approached I went out alone and stood about thirty yards from the fort, having only my pistol. As the company came, up near me I placed my hand on my pistol and told them to halt. They halted but com- menced to threaten and abuse the whole fraternity sparing none. I explained our situation, being simply custodians of the goods, not knowing whose they were ; but only knew who left us there, and we could not consistently recognize any orders except from those under whose instructions we were acting. My reason- ing had no effect whatever, but Tom called on his crowd to say if the goods should be taken. The vote was to take them. Now that no one may suppose that I wish to appear brave, I will say that the way I had my men placed, and the instructions given, if a weapon had been drawn on me, half Williams' company would have been shot dead before I could have been harmed. I said to Williams just hold on one minute and hear what I have to say: "We have been here all winter eating poor beef and raw hide to take care of these goods. We have had but little fun, and would just as soon have some now as not ; in fact would like a little row. If you think you can take the fort just try it. But I don't think you can take me to commence with ; and the first one that offers any violence to me is a dead man. Now I FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. IO9 dare you to go past me towards the fort." This seemed to take them back. I meant what I said, and some of them knew my disposition, which in those days, was not the most Christian-Hke when a white man was before me as an enemy. After looking at me a moment Tom said, '' For your family's sake I will spare you, for I think you d d fool enough to die before you would give up the goods." I thanked him and said I believed as he did. After this we had no more trouble. Many times I have thought I should have shown our force openly to have deterred Williams, but he was such a known bully and so conceited that I felt just like " taking him down a notch," and this did it. CHAPTER XIX. Ample Food Supplies Arrive — I go to Salt Lake City — My report to President Young — He approves it — I am accused of Stealing — My vindication. THE wagons being sent out for the goods soon be- gan to arrive. Provisions were not in question now, as we had plenty. There was also a big Y. X. company, Levi Stewart in charge, going down to stock the road, and a company of Elders traveling with hand- carts came through from Salt Lake City. It was about one week from the first arrival until the last of these arrived. President Young had sent me several letters con- taining instructions of various kinds pertaining to my no FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. duties ; but one particular letter of definite instructions how to arrange many things, had not arrived. I kept waiting for it, as there were many things to do that I had no instructions about. I kept enquiring but no letter came. Finally all were in. I asked some of the older and more experienced Elders what I should do. Their answer was that they were also expecting instructions and that they were more in need of counsel than able to give it. There were over two hundred teams now on the ground, many of the owners beginning to get impatient at the delay. I was at a loss what to do, so I went out after night and asked the Lord to help me out. I told Him I desired to do exactly what was best, but did not know a thing about it, and made this proposition that I would take my clerk with me in the morning, and when a question was asked me by any one what to do, I would tell the clerk to write down just what first came to my mind. And if that was right to please remove the spirit of oppression that I was laboring under and allow me to go back to the fort and enjoy myself with my friends. My mind was at once entirely relieved. I went and passed a pleasant evening. Next morning without saying anything about the' lack of instructions we commenced business. Soon some one asked whose teams were to be loaded first, I dictated to my clerk. Thus we continued. As fast as the clerk put them down, orders would be given, and we passed on to the next. We continued this for four days. Everything that I felt to be my duty was done. All the teams were loaded up, companies organized and started back, men detailed to remain a while longer. Elders furnished flour, and a great deal of business was done. A memorandum was kept of all this. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. Ill I hitched up a team and started for home when everything was in shape. I reached Salt Lake City a few hours ahead of the freight teams, and went to Presi- dent Young's office. He was very glad to see me, expressing much sympathy and saying that if he had known of our suffering in time he would have sent us supplies at any cost. I acted a little stiff for I did not know whether my management of the last business would be approved of or not, but I was determined to defend my actions, for I knew I had done the best I could. Soon Brother Young asked me if I had attended to everything in order before leaving. My reply was, "I hope I did but do not know." "Well, you acted according to my instructions, did you not?" "I don't know. I did not get any instructions, and it was pretty hard on me." I handed him my book saying: " Here is a report of what we did ; I hope it is satisfactory." , Brother Brigham asked his clerk, T. D. Brown, about the letter of instructions. Brother Brown said a few days after the last of these companies left, in looking over his papers he found a letter directed to D. W. Jones. It was the letter that should have been sent. Brother Brigham commenced reading my report, and as he read would remark, ''That is right; this is right. Well, you seemed to get along all right." I began to feel pretty good. Finally Brother Brown was told to look over the letter, which was very large, containing many items of special instructions. My report agreed with the whole of it. This confirmed me more than ever in my faith in inspiration. Also in the honesty of Brigham Young and his counseling, for if his instruc- tions had not been honest I would never have been 112 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. Inspired to anticipate them. The trouble lies with us ; we many times want to dictate the inspiration, or, in other words, put forward our own ideas and desires and call them inspirations. I met my mother-in-law in Salt Lake City and heard from my wife and two children, who were living with Father P. Colton in Provo. We started for home the next day, where I met my family after so long and severe a trip. It was with joy and thankfulness that I greeted my wife, who was one of the best and most faithful wives that ever blessed a husband. This was the spring after what is known as the win- ter of the Reformation. The reformation move was doubtless intended for and resulted in good; but like everything else where good is found the devil comes along to see what's up. So it was nothing strange if while browsing around he had a hand in some of the moves of men. This I soon became satisfied was the case now, and I did not take much "stock " in what some people called reformation. When I left Devil's Gate, it was with the understand- ing that I was to return there and take charge of the place as a Y. X. station, but Brother Brigham counter- manded the order, saying that I had had enough of Devil's Gate for one man. As I was so sure of going back when I left Devil's Gate I had left my gun, saddle, a wagon that I had traded for, as well as a lot of carriage springs that I had gathered up. In these days there were many things thrown away on the plains that were of value, and it was profitable to go back with teams and gather up wagon tires and other things which had been abandoned. I spoke to Brother Brigham about this. He said he wished me to FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. I 1 3 Stop in the city long enough to help dehver the goods to the owners. Patrick Lynch and myself were appointed to take charge of them. I soon learned that strange stories had been put in circulation about me. I was accused of stealing and hiding away thousands of dollars' worth of goods. As there was no communication between us and the valley how this started was a mystery, only to be accounted for by men's imaginations. So strong was the belief in my guilt that about the time the reformation was at its height in Provo, a teacher came to visit my wife, telling her that she ought to leave me and marry some good man. I could give the name of the teacher, but he is now dead so I will spare his memory. My wife answered, "Well I will not leave Daniel Jones. I cannot better myself, for if he will steal there is not an honest man on earth." I always appreciated the answer. One family who I will also spare as they are not yet dead came to search my house for stolen goods but did not find any. They professed to be very sorry for having come. My wife treated them with perfect civility; no doubt they were ashamed of themselves and are to this day when they think of the indignity. While de- livering their goods I was often accused of having robbed people. The goods formerly spoken of being divided to cache were never replaced and I had to bear the blame. Again, before the trains had stopped in the snow-storms, so I was informed by some of the brethren who stayed at Devil's Gate, there had been a number of heavy boxes emptied, the goods stuffed into sacks and the boxes broken up for firewood. The owners of course looked in vain for their boxes. Many sacks of goods remained at the Tithing Office for a long time before being identi- fied by the owners of the goods. I believe the most of 7 114 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. these articles finally got where they belonged. But in the meantime I was "Paddy Miles' boy," who had done all the mischief. Brother Lynch felt so Indignant that he reported these accusations to President Young when I received the following letter: " President's Office, Great Salt Lake City, ''June I ith, 1857. ''To the Bishops and Presidents in Utah, ''Beloved Brethren: "Inasmuch as there are some persons disposed to find fault with the management of Brother Daniel W. Jones while at Devil's Gate, we feel desirous to express ourselves perfectly satisfied with his labors while there, and with the care that he has taken of the property intrusted to him. He has our confidence, and we say, God bless him for what he has done. The men who find fault with the labors of Brother Jones the past winter, we wish their names sent to this office, and when the Lord presents an opportunity we will try them and see if they will do any better. *'Brigham Young, " Daniel H. Wells, "George D. Grant." FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. II 5 CHAPTER XX. My Trading Trip — President Young Asks me to Meet some False Charges — Wicked Reports Concerning me — Their Unjustness made Manifest — The President's Stern Reproof to my Accusers — An Excellent Recommend. MY WIFE remained in the city with me during the time we were delivering the goods, some three weeks. After getting through, I, in company with W. Roberts of Provo, fitted up a team and went back to trade. Roberts remained at the South Pass while I went down with two yoke of oxen to Devil's Gate. It maybe interesting to some to give a brief description of my trip going down, some ninety miles. Stephen Markham was in charge of the Y. X. station at the South Pass. He had nine head of good milk cows in charge which he had orders to send to Devil's Gate for the use of men sta- tioned there. He offered to furnish me a horse if I would drive them down. This was agreeable, as I would have had to foot it otherwise. As I could not carry provisions very well, and hav- ing money, it was supposed that I could buy bread at least, as there were trains of California emigrants con- tinually on the road. Cups were scarce, so when I started out I had nothing but my blankets and gun. I happened to have a new clay pipe in my pocket. After asking several persons to sell me a cup and some bread and being refused, concluded to see if I could not get through with what I had. The cows all gave plenty of milk and were gentle. I necessarily had to milk them to keep their udders from spoiling. So when I would get a cow all milked but the strippings I would put the stem of the pipe into my mouth and milk into the bowl and draw the Il6 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. milk through. This was about the same as sucking ''mint julep" with a straw. I enjoyed it immensely, being fond of new milk. I found it so much better than eating rawhide that I ceased asking the emigrants I met for either a cup or bread. I made the trip through in less than four days ; probably felt a little "calfish" but never lost my flesh or strength. While at Devil's Gate on this trip some parties arrived from the states bringing news of the army being ordered to 'Utah ; and that the mail contract which had been let to Brigham Young and company was cancelled, and that in consequence of this the Y. X. (Young's Ex- press) companies were all called home. This was start- ling news, as all had been at peace and nothing to justify the move could be surmised. The cause of this whole raid and the result are matters of history, so I will not mention the subject at present. After getting my stuff together two of the brethren who had stayed there during the winter accompanied me and we started back towards South Pass, making the trip in good time. My partner, Mr. Roberts, having traded to good advantage, we were soon ready to start home. On arriving in Salt Lake City I went to the Tithing Office as I had some articles belonging there. I was informed that Brother Brigham wished to see me. I went at once to his office, not even taking time to wash my face. As I got to the outside door of Brother Young's office I met him coming out alone. After shak- ing hands, inquiring after my health, etc., he said, ''Come, let us take a Utrie walk. I want to talk to you." We started and went toward his barn in the rear of his dwelling. He informed me that there had been a formal FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. I 1 7 complaint made against me for robbing the people of their goods while at Devil's Gate ; said these complaints were made by some of the Elders in behalf of them- selves and others. He gave the names of some of my accusers. He then asked, "Are you willing to meet these accusations and answer them?" I replied, "Yes, sir, I am both willing and glad of the opportunity." At the same time I gave the names of some I wished as witnesses. He then said, "Be here in ten days from today and we will hear these complaints." I felt quite sore and would like to have had a little consolation from Brother Brigham, but he commenced moving about, showing me his horses and cattle and chatting till we returned to his office. His manner was kind and pleasant. He asked me about my trip and success. Also made some remarks about the army ; say- ing that we would have a busy time soon. Said the boys were going out to meet the army and see about getting the road clear so that there would be no obstructions in the way until they got near enough to us that we could see what was best to do with them without having to go too far ; that he had sent word to have everything belong- ing to the mail company on the road, all goods and everything "Mormon" started west as soon as possible. It was harvest time when I got home to Provo. I felt almost sick. I had never taken to the amount of a cent anything except such as we were compelled to use, and these were always kept in account by the clerk. As I had many opportunities to take goods and hide them and no one be the wiser, and as goods had been misplaced, people were not entirely to blame for accusing me after the stories had once got in circulation. The originators of these accusations were the more responsible parties. Il8 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. Many of the stones originated with the man who left his keys with me. To please his family and other relatives he had collected for presents considerable stuff while on his mission. Some of these things he had given away to the brethren, as heretofore mentioned. I believe he left his trunks and keys with me in perfect good faith at the time. After getting home he naturally supposed we would use much of his stuff and that this would jus- tify him in accounting not only for what he had given away but for all that his good-heartedness would have caused him to do for his family. So there was nothing mentioned scarcely but what he was fetching them, pro- vided it was not taken from his trunks. When his goods arrived and many of these fine things were missing, (one bill of fifty pairs of silk stockings among the rest) of course ''Jones stole them." I carried his keys all winter in my pocket, entrusting them to no one, so of course I knew whether anything was stolen or not. It was this same man's wife that came to search for stolen goods during the winter. There was so much rascality brought to light that winter that it was no won- der that nearly everyone except my wife and family thought I was guilty. The emigrants, taking their cue from this brother, passed my name far and wide as a great robber. So much so that I was refused admittance into a quorum of Seventies at Provo that I had formerly been invited to join. I returned home and worked a few days in the har- vest field. I said but little to anyone about my coming trial. I was tempted at times to leave the country, for it seemed to me that I had no friends. The devil tempted me continually to believe that President 'Young would believe my accusers, they being men of influence. Then FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. I I9 there was another spirit whispering to me, saying, "You are innocent; he Is a prophet and will understand the truth." This spirit prevailed. On arriving at President Young s office August 25th, 1857, I found quite a number present. I was asked if I was ready for the hearing. I replied that I did not see my witnesses. President Young answered: ''When we need them we will send for them." I was then called upon to give my report and show how we had lived, what the cost of living was, etc. I had an account of all our expenditures, which amounted to about 75 cts. a week for each man. Some one remarked that we could not live so cheaply. Then began quite a discussion over our cheap living. Some were Inclined to question my statement. Brother Young said to me, "Brother Jones, get up and tell the brethren just how you lived, and explain to them why your accounts only amount to 75 cts. a week. I then made the statement that we had killed and eaten forty head of cattle that were so poor they were dying; we had lived on the meat and hides some two months ; that we had not credited the owners anything for them, as we thought it was worth the cattle to eat them. That we had killed some game at various times. That was ours, no credit allowed ; had lived two weeks on thistles dug from the frozen ground, no credit ; . one week on native garlic ; three days on minnows caught with a dip-net, fish too small to clean, rather bitter In taste, no credit ; several meals on prickly pear leaves roasted, no credit ; several days without anything much but water to drink, no credit ; some five months mostly on short rations without bread or salt. These were about all the reasons for the price being so low. The seventy-five cents per week covered all the meats bought I20 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. of Indians or anyone else. All groceries, soap, candles, in fact everything used belonging to the companies, in- cluding some leather owned by F. D. Richards, who remarked to me that he was glad it was there for us to use. Brothers Jas. Ferguson and W. C. Dunbar also made the same remark about some groceries used of theirs. Not so with some others. They grieved very much over what stufT had been used of theirs. After I got through making my statements. Brother Young asked each of my accusers what they had to say. No one answered. Then he spoke each man's name, asking them one at a time if they believed what I had said. All replied in the affirmative. He asked each one if they believed I had been honest, and taken good care of their goods. All answered "Yes." Brother Young then stood up and said to the brethren, "You have accused Bro. Jones of stealing from you and others whom you represent, some five thousand dollars worth of goods. These accusations commenced in the winter when Brother Jones and com- panions were eating raw hide and poor meat, suffering every privation possible to take care of your stuff. How such stories started when there was no communication can only be accounted for by the known power of Satan to deceive and lie. These accusations continued until I, hearing of them, wrote a letter to the Bishops and Presi- dents, expressing my confidence in Brother Jones' labors; knowing at that time, as well as I do now, that he was innocent. I knew what Brother Jones' feelings were the other day when I notified him of this trial." Turning to me he said, "You wanted to ask me if I thought you guilty, but I gave you no chance to ask the question. I wanted you to learn that when I decide anything, as I had in your case, I do not change my mind. You were FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 121 not brought here for trial for being guilty, but to give you a chance to stop these accusations." Then turning to my accusers again, "How does this look? After charging Brother Jones as you have, he makes a simple statement, affirming nothing, neither witnessing any- thing, and each of you say you believe he has told the truth. You have nothing to answer save that he is an honest man. Well, now, what have you brought him here for? " One of the complainers then asked if some of the company with me might not have stolen the goods. I answered "No; I am here to answer for all. Besides it would have been almost impossible for anyone besides myself to have taken anything unbeknown to others." Bro. asked, "If neither Bro. Jones nor the brethren with him have taken anything, how is it that I have lost so much?" Brother Brigham replied, "It is because you lie. You have not lost as you say you have." This I knew to be correct as before stated, I had this brother's keys and knew that nothing had been taken. Brother Brigham continued talking, chastising some of the Elders present for their ingratitude. Brother Kimball also felt indignant toward them. Finally Brother Brigham commenced to pronounce a curse upon those who had spoken falsely about me. I asked him to stop before he had finished the words, and told him I could bear their accusations better than they could bear his curse. He then blessed me, saying they would be cursed if they did not cease their talk ; saying that we had seen the hardest time that any Elders ever had. While the "Mormon" Battalion suffered, they were free to travel, looking forward with hope to something, better; but that we were much longer under suffering conditions. 122 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. as we were tied up and had no hope only to stay and take our chances. When done speaking he asked me what would sat- isfy me and what demands I had to make. I told him of the refusal to admit me into the quorum at Provo, saying that if I was considered worthy, I would like a recom- mend so as to have fellowship there. The following letter was given me : ''Great Salt Lake City, President's Office, ''Aug. 25th, 1857. "This is to certify to all whom it may concern, that we, the undersigned, have investigated the matters between Daniel W. Jones and the brethren who stayed with him at Devil's Gate, last winter, and those who left goods at that place, and we are satisfied that Brother Jones and those with him did the best they possibly could, were perfectly honest, and that Brother Jones has satisfactorily accounted for all the things which were taken ; and they were necessarily taken to save the lives of himself and company. "We consider that Brother Jones is entitled to the praise, confidence and respect of all good men for the wise, self-denying and efficient course he pursued. And we recommend him to all as a faithful brother in good standing and full fellowship in the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints. (Signed) "Brigham Young, Daniel Spencer, "Heber C. Kimball, John Van Cott, "Daniel H. Wells, George D. Grant, "John Taylor, C. H. Wheelock, "Amasa Lyman, Edmund Ellsworth, F. D. Richards. T. W. Ellerbeck, "Clerk. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. I 23, Brother Brigham said if we had set fire to the whole outfit and run off by the Hght of it he would never have found fault. So the trial ended and I went home feeling pretty well. I was asked many years after this trial by a son-in- law of one of my accusers if Brother Brigham did not favor me in the trial because we had been partial and used others' goods, leaving Brother Brigham's alone. I replied, ''No, sir; Brother Brigham had no goods whatever at Devil's Gate. Neither had his name ever showed on box or bale, therefore he could not have favored us on that account. He decided as he did simply because he was just and right. Whether we were all naturally honest or not, we were honest this trip, at least; for there was hardly a day but what starvation stared us in the face, and we were not much inclined to pilfer dry goods anyway." I presented my recommend to the quorum which now received me into their fellowship. After this some few came to me asking about goods in rather an accus- ing manner. I referred them to Brother Brigham. So far and wide had the stories gone, that many took advan- tage of them. One old lady, an emigrant, who went to live in Provo, played a sharp game, but was found out. She had three daughters who were all married soon after getting in. These young ladies, as is usual with Eng- lish girls, had a nice lot of linen. So when the luggage arrived, in the spring, the old lady came from Provo for the family goods. She, considering her daughters pro- vided for, and being thrifty in her nature and liking to appear well, took her daughters' linen and traded it for furniture. The reader must know that in those days anything from a pumpkin to a petticoat was a legal tender for 124 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. some amount, so the old lady had no trouble in making the exchange. She went back feeling indignant at "Jones" for robbing her daughters. She was a great tea-party woman and never missed a chance to tell of my cruel conduct, sometimes shedding tears over it. One man who had married a daugher became a little suspicious, so he went to the city and visited the furniture dealer, and soon found the linen. He told me of the circumstance and asked me what I wished done, as he considered it an outrage. I told him it was not worth noticing, as there were so many similar things ; to let the old woman and her daughters settle their own affairs, that would be punishment enough. I could tell of many more but this will suffice. Some of these sto- ries were related during the investigation. CHAPTER XXI. The Echo Canyon War — An Invading Foe — Plans for checking its Progress — Peace declared-^Pardon granted — The true Cause of the Trouble — I work at Saddlery — The unjustifiable Killing of Yates — Visit from Indians. 1WILL not attempt to give a full account of the Echo Canyon war but will give only sufficient to connect this history. Word reached Utah on the twenty-fourth of July, 1857, while the people were celebrating Pioneer day in Big Cottonwood canyon that U. S. troops were on the road to Utah. As soon as this report was confirmed, and the intentions of the invaders fully learned — which FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 1 25 were to place the Territory under martial law, on the pretext that the "Mormons" were in a state of rebellion — Brigham Young, both as President of the Church, and Governor of the Territory, commenced to advise and issue orders to meet the situation. The far-off settle- ments, San Bernardino In Lower California and Carson valley, Nevada, both thrifty, prosperous places, were broken up and the people called home to Utah. There was a determined spirit manifested by both leaders and people to be ready to meet in the best possible way whatever might come. No fear nor timidity was shown. Neither was there lack of counsel, but everything that was required to be done was promptly directed and as promptly executed. A few companies of cavalry militia were sent out to reconnoiter. Nothing official could be done by Governor Young on rumor. Finally an armed force not officially known to him was found Invading the Territory of Utah. As soon as this was reported. The Governor ordered General Wells to Interrupt them and hinder their approach, and protect the people of the Territory from the Invading foe. The question may be asked, did not President Young and the people know that these were government troops ? President Young and the people knew it was a political mob ; Governor Young, not being notified officially of their coming, only knew them as an armed enemy entering the Territory. He was appointed by the President of the United States to govern under the laws common in the country. According to his oath of office, he could do no less than try to protect his Territory. Governor Young had no more right to know this army than had the sentinel on duty to know his captain unless the captain gives the counter sign. This T26 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. Johnston at first refused to give, but as the sequel shows, ^ever got in until he ** hollowed turkey." This force continued to advance. The troops ordered out by General Wells did what they could to hinder their progress toward the valleys. The situation finally became so serious that companies were ordered from Davis, Salt Lake, and Utah counties to fortify Echo canyon. I went with the regiment from Utah under Colonal Pace, and had charge of a few picked riflemen. We remained in Echo during the winter fortifying the place. The boys on the plains made it very disagreeable for the advancing army nightly, running off their beef herd, burning their provision trains and the grass, and in every way possible impeding their progress. Finally, winter set in with severity, catching them in the mount- .ains at Fort Bridger, where they were obliged to stay for the winter. They were short of supplies and had a hard time wintering. Albert Sidney Johnston was in com- mand. After this army was fully settled in their quarters, part of the Utah army returned home, leaving only enough to watch the moves at Bridger. This was a winter of business for the "Mormon" people. There was no thought of submission, everything was fully -arranged for the spring work. As soon as the weather moderated in the spring of 1858, the people commenced to move from Salt Lake ■wanted to know what class of books they were : FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 255 if religious. I told him they were. He said he would rather have some good novels ; that he did not care much for religion, but asked what denomination we represented. I told him, ''Mormons." At this all three burst into loud laughter, the post master and interpreter making many jesting remarks to the officer, and saying to me, "Yes, he will let you in. You are all right. You will get in." I was a little puzzled, not knowing whether this was favorable or otherwise. Soon the custom officer turned (as yet I had not spoken a word of Spanish) and said directly to me, "Well, I guess I will have to let you in. I have just been telling these gentlemen that I am a Mormon in principle, and that I wished some of them would come along. That I thought your religion the most sensible of any. You will do good in Mexico, and you shall cross over. I will fix it so you will not have to pay a cent." I now thanked him in his own language and said we would try and act so as to retain the good opinion he had of us and our people. We shook hands as friends. He kept his word entirely, and we crossed over at once, rented quarters and got ready for the winter's campaign. We were the first Mormon missionaries that entered Mexico. This was in January, 1876. 256 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. CHAPTER XXXVIII. A Priest warns his Congregation Against Mormons — We find some Friends — Our Plans for the Season — Letter from President Young — Threats of some Rowdies — The Peaceful Results. WE ARRIVED in the Republic of Mexico on Friday. It was not long before everyone in El Paso knew of the arrival of Mormons. We were stared at, but nothing occurred until Sunday that indicated anything unusual. On Sunday we concluded to go to the Catholic church, the only one in town. The building was crowded. We stood in a group near the entrance. There was quite a jam of people around as, and many furtive glances and dark, wicked looks were directed toward us. About the worst element in Mexico can be found in Paso del Norte, or El Paso. Padre Borajo (pronounced, borah-ho) officiated. After the usual services of tingling bells, kneeling before the cross and various performances common in a Mexican Catholic church, services were over. The padre who was quite old and lean (something very unusual for a priest ; most of them being rather corpulent) mounted the stand, and in a very impressive mann er, commenced to warn the people against us. These were his words in substance : ''The world's history gives an account of great plagues that have visited the world from time to time. Mankind has been subjected to great calamities, such as wars, storms, cholera, small pox, great drouth and floods. We of this land have been subjected to many plagues. The murderous Apaches have made war upon us for many years. We have had our ditches and dams de- FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 257 stroyed by floods, so that some seasons we have had to suffer hunger. *'We have had many revolutions and thousands have been killed. Lately we have had the grasshoppers come and destroy every green herb and product. But all these things have made war only on the body of the man. None have had a tendency to destroy the soul. "Now of all the plagues that ever visited the earth to curse and destroy mankind we have the worst just come to us and there stand the representatives of this plague. Look at them. Their faces show what they are. "Thanks to God we have been warned in time by the Holy Pope that false prophets and teachers would come among us. "These men," pointing to us, "represent all that is low and depraved. They have destroyed the morals of their own people, and have now come here to pollute the people of this place." (I thought if that was so we had a hard job on hand.) "They have no virtue. They all have from six to one dozen wives. Now they have come here to extend the practice into Mexico. / de- nounce them. Yes, here in the presence of the image of the Virgin Mary, I denounce them as barbarians. * * And I want you all to get their books and fetch them to me and I will burn them." As Brother Tenney was not present, I was the only one of our party who perfectly understood his words. I began to feel as though it would be best for us to get out of the crowd before the spirit got too high, as some fanatic might be tempted to slip a sharp knife in among our ribs. We managed to work ourselves gradually out of the crowd which filled the door yard for several feet. When 16 258 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. clear we walked straight way to our quarters, where I translated all that had been said. It was taken down at the time and to the best of my memory was about as here given. We could not help but be amused at the old fellow's vehemence, and our first introduction to Mexico. For some days after this when women in the streets would see any of us coming, they would jump into the first door and close it and then look out through what all Mexican houses have in their doors — a peep hole. Some of the women who ran from us were of the class that do not often scare at a man, yet they acted as though they dreaded us. We managed to pass quietly along never seeming to notice these actions, but often had a hearty laugh when we got to our quarters. On enquiry we learned that the laws of Mexico, under the new constitution, required all religious services to be performed in a structure recognized as a church building. One liberal-minded gentleman, Esperidion Sanches, gave us much information. He said the law simply re- quired the presiding officer of a town to recognize a house for the occasion, and put the police to protect it ; but if the civil authority was under the influence of the priests, they could baffle us and forbid us preaching in any house except a regular church edifice, erected solely for religious worship. Sanches told me the Jefe Politico of Paso del Norte, was an affable gendeman but a strong Catholic, and he doubted if we would be able to get the privilege of hold- ing meetings. When we called upon the gentleman he told us that he understood the law forbade any FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 259 religious services performed except in a house especially erected for religious purposes. I tried to reason with him. He listened to me patiently, but said no difference how unreasonable the law might seem we would have to submit. I then asked him if the law defined any particular material to be used, or size, or shape the house should be built, that possibly we might take it in hand to build a church. This he could not answer. I visited him several times but to no purpose. The laws forbade all street preaching. I felt determined not to be beaten. There were a number of the better class of citizens visited us and protested against the way the priest had talked about us, saying that none but ignorant fanatics would sustain such talk. This gave us an opportunity to explain our mission and principles to many that would not have listened if it had not been for the padre s rabid talk. Finally an idea occurred to me. President Young had presented me with a good new set of saddler's tools before leaving Salt Lake City. He had said that they might help me out sometime when nothing else would. So I called once more on the Jefe Politico. He was always patient and polite. After talking a while about the meeting house I told him I had given up the idea of holding meetings until I went to Chihuahua and saw the governor. This seemed to please him for he desired peace, and he was afraid for us to attempt holding meetings in Paso del Norte, as the people were much under the influence of priest-craft. I asked him how he would like a saddle shop started. He said it would be a good thing ; that many people needed saddles and had to pay a high price for them ; that he thought I could do well making saddles ; in fact 26o FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. much better than preaching, as no one would pay me for preaching, but would be glad to pay me a big price for a good saddle. When I talked with my companions, showing my plans, all agreed with me. So we rented quite a large house for a saddler shop. I hired a bench and vise, put up my tools, bought some timber and went to work mak- ing saddle-trees. My son Wiley assisted me. Soon the people began to call in to look at my work. As there was no law against conversation, especially in one's own house, we soon got to having quite respect- able audiences and the spirit of friendship grew up toward us. Some of the brethren went over on the Texas side, to Ysleta, to winter where the stock could be fed more cheaply than in El Paso. Brothers Tenney and Smith, did not want to go on into Mexico, so we agreed that they should have the privilege of laboring in New Mexico among the Pueblos and Zunis, and then return home. As they never reported to me, all I know about them is what I have learned from others. Brother James Brown took charge of that field of labor. About this time I received the following letter: ''' Salt Lake City, U. T., ''January 22nd, 1876. ''Elder D. W, Jones, El Paso, Texas, "Dear Brother: — K was more than pleased to receive your favor of the loth inst, and was much interested in its contents, not to say amused at your account of the oration by the padre, as an introductory greeting into Mexico. Like you, I doubt not but that the opposition bodes good for you, and the success of your mission. I feel that it would be wise for you to FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 26 1 visit the old original blood as much as possible. Let the Catholic church alone ; if its members wish to hear the truth, expound it to them as to any other people, but do not debate with them. And as to the curses of the priests, you need not regard them as much as you would a mosquito, in the season of the year when these insects trouble. "Be cautious in your labors and movements; do not court opposition, but move steadily on, presenting the truths of the gospel to those who will hear you, and inviting all to become partakers of the gospel of the Son of God. You have the faith and prayers of all that you will be able to do a good work, and I have no doubt but that you will see me again in the flesh yet many times. ''Brother James S. Brown has returned from his visit to Arizona. He left the brethren of his party build- ing a fort at Moencoppy, 20x40 feet. Whilst in that country he, with three others, went a long distance up the Little Colorado River, from the Moencoppy, passing up beyond where you crossed. He fully substantiates the statements made by yourself and the brethren of your party with regard to the desirability of the upper valleys of the Little Colorado as settlements for the Saints. We have called about two hundred brethren, whom we think of dividing into companies of 50, to set- tle on the Little Colorado and adjacent country. These brethren will mostly be ready to start by the ist of Feb- ruary. A most excellent spirit prevails with regard to this mission amongst the brethren, and numbers more would have been willing to have gone had they been wanted. We shall send down a grist and saw-mill dur- ing the summer. Among those called is Elder Lot Smith, who will have charge of one company of fifty. "Since my letter to you of Nov. 8th, addressed to Tucson, we have had a very peaceable and quiet time. Judge White set me at liberty, soon after, from the unjust imprisonment of Judge Boreman for contempt. Brother Reynolds has again been tried, convicted for obeying the law of the Lord and sentenced to two years' 262 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. hard labor in the U. S. House of Correction at Detroit and $500 fine. He appealed and was admitted to bail. The appeal will come up in June. "Brother Cannon has been seated in Congress; his contestant has not made much of a show yet. I notice by the telegrams that Mr. Christiancy, senator from Michigan, has introduced a bill to provide for challenges to jurors in trials for bigamy and polygamy; that it shall be sufficient cause, for the rejection of a juror, that he has more than one wife living, or that he believes It mor- ally right for a man to live with more than one wife. Well, the faster it comes the sooner the end will be. ''Our legislature is now in session with plenty of work provided for it. If the members feel it consistent or necessary to attend to all that is suggested they will have to be very wary and prudent, or our ever watchful enemies will introduce some bills that, if enacted, will prove snares and pitfalls. They will have to work for nothing, for Congress has allowed the U. S. Marshal to spend the appropriations for the payment of the legisla- ture and passed a law prohibiting the legislature from passing any act to pay themselves out of the Territorial Treasury. "The new building of the Z. C. M. I. is a great suc- cess. It is lighter than the most sanguine expected. It presents, now that the elegent front is on, a most hand- some and imposing appearance. We expect to com- mence business in it about the 7th of March. "My health is generally good; occasionally I catch cold and then I suffer from rheumatism. I hope the temple at St. George will be sufficiently near completion at the end of February to enable me to go down at that time and dedicate the lower portion. "With love to yourself and all the brethren associ- ated with you, and with constant prayers that you may enjoy all the blessings that in your heart you can right- eously desire, and that abundant success may crown your labors, I remain "Your brother in the Gospel, "Brigham Young." FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. ' 263 I did very well with my saddle work, earning enough to assist some little in keeping up expenses. The brethren with me were all diligent and acted in a manner to create a respect for our people and religion. We had meetings quite often on the American side of the river, that were generally well attended, and good order prevailed during the whole winter, with one excep- tion. We were informed one Saturday that there was a crowd of Irish Catholics that intended to rotten egg us the next day, Sunday, if we attempted to preach in Franklin. I told our informers that we expected to preach and hoped the Irishmen would change their minds. There was an old acquaintance of mine, Tom Mas- sey, who knew me in Santa Fe. Tom told these Irish- men that he did not know what religion had done for me, but unless it had done more than is common, they would not meet with much success, and advised them not to try it. Massey was a saloon keeper and gambler, and was considered authority on all questions that had to be settled with the knife and pistol, and I think his advice had some effect. However, next morning when meeting opened there was quite a large audience. About the time I com- menced speaking the Irish gents came in, sat down near the door, and soon began groaning. I walked down near them and told them that I was capable of making all the noise necessary, provided the audience wished to hear my noise, but if they preferred theirs to mine they could say so, and I would give them the floor. Several in the audience called for me to go on and told the disturbers to keep quiet. They made no more 264 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. disturbance. This gave me a good text and I explained plainly the gospel of repentance ; referred a little to my experience in that country when a boy. I could talk plainly as there were persons present who had known me and knew that I was rather a hard case in a rough- and-tumble-go-as-you-please fight. I told them our doctrine required us to forsake all of our evil ways and to be willing to bear all kinds of persecution meekly; that I had endeavored to school myself in these principles and hoped that I had suc- ceeded; but that I was not quite certain yet; and that I hoped I would be spared the trial for a year or two longer before having to be thumped for my religious belief as I might not be prepared to take abuse with a submissive spirit. In explaining Mormonism I said that the gospel did not debar a person from any pleasure he desired to enjoy. Brothers Pratt and Stewart followed and spoke on the first principles of the gospel. After meeting was dismissed the leader of the dis- turbers met us at the door. He asked me to go and take a drink with him. I told him I did not drink liquor. "Then you go back on your own words, do you?" he questioned. I asked him what he meant. He said "While preaching you made the statement that your religion allowed you any pleasure you desired." "Yes sir, but drinking whisky is no pleasure to me and I do not desire to drink any." "Well, do you ever eat anything," he asked. "Yes, we are all good eaters." "Well then come with me to the hotel and I will pay for a good dinner for as many of you as will come." Brother Pratt and some others went along. We FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 265 had a good dinner and when we went to go our friend said, "If any body bothers you let me know and I will lick them for you. I like to fight but would rather fight for you boys than to fight you. Good bye." To finish this, — some ten years after as I was sitting at the dinner table at Pueblo, Colorado, I noticed a man looking across the table at me. I soon recognized him as my Irish friend. I spoke and asked if he knew me. *'Yes, I know you. How are you?" he asked, reaching across the table and shaking hands with me. "Have you ever thought of me?" I enquired. "Yes a thousand times." I told him I had often thought of him, and with a few more words we parted. I feel an interest now in this man and would be glad to meet him again and know his name. I can say that I have often observed, in the course of my experience, that every man, even the worst, has something good about him if properly treated. 266 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. CHAPTER XXXIX. Justice in Early Days — We Prepare to go Further — Our Letter of In- troduction — Loss of our Animals — We Trail and find Them. [WILL give you a short account of the actions of the first authorities of FrankHn as given to me by the main actor, that the ''tenderfeet" of the present day may know a Httle of the experiences of early days. When Franklin first established itself as a town, Judge Jones was elected mayor and Ben Dowel marshal. Soon after organizing a number of roughs came in and started to run the town, defying the officers. This would have been all right and possibly admired a few days be- fore the organization, but now order must be kept and the laws vindicated. A warrant was issued and the marshal and posse approached the rioters. A man was killed, but the out- laws kept possession of the street and defied the officers. Something had to be done. The dockets show that these men were arrested, brought to trial and found guilty of murder in the first degree ; that the court sentenced them to be shot ; that Ben Dowel and others were ordered by the court to execute the orders. Accordingly the orders were duly executed, and Dowel and his assistants, the judge being one of the party, proceeded to shoot four of these condemned men on the street in front of the main saloon of the town. They were buried, as the records show, and the costs of court and all proceedings duly recorded. Judge Jones showed me the record and explained how it was done. I never heard any complaint about FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 26/ the proceedings but, on the other hand, Judge Jones and Ben Dowel were very much respected by the average citizens of the country. During the winter Brothers Pratt and Stewart re- mained most of the time at Ysleta. Brother Ivins helped me make saddle-trees, took care of the stock, and made himself generally useful. I worked most of the time in the shop, my son Wiley helping me. We boarded with a Mexican family, Santiago Vega, who treated us very kindly, often posting us on what was said of us. The Mexican people are great riders and fond of a good saddle. This gave me a chance to talk to the people. All seemed friendly. Even the priest who had given us such a setting up came and patronized us. We also distributed a few books. We tried quite hard to get a hearing from the natives that lived in and around El Paso, but the priest kept such a watch upon our moves that we had but little chance. These natives are known as Pueblos. Never having mixed with the Spanish blood they are still pure blooded Indians. They are generally poor, occupying lands owned by the rich. They desired to hear us and appointed meetings, but were warned that if they listened to us their rents would be raised or they would be driven from their lands. So we had to let them alone, seeing their situation. The brethren held meetings often at Ysleta and adjacent towns. One family, by the name of Campbell, who resided at San Elesario, opened their doors to the Elders, treating them with great kindness. This family afterwards joined the Church. After recruiting our animals and feeling that we had done about all the good in our power in El Paso, we determined to make a move into the interior and go to 2 68 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. the city of Chihuahua. We were told that the governor, Senor Ochoa, was a very Hberal-minded man and not under priestly control, and that he would be very likely to allow us the privilege of preaching. I wrote to President Young regularly. We receiv- ed letters from him in return, giving us kind encourage- ment and instructions. I reported to him our finances, which were getting short, stating that we intended going on and working our way through the best we could. We received a postal card directing us to wait till we heard from him. When we did hear it was in the shape of postal orders for money sufficient to bear our expenses for some time. Before leaving El Paso I called on the Jefe Politico. I had hoped that I could get some kind of a letter from him that would assist us in getting introduced into Chi- huahua. The Jefe had the reputation of being a very kind and affectionate father, extremely fond of his wife and children, so I called on him at his residence. He received me kindly and expressed regret that we were going away. Said that he had had his opinion changed about the Mormons. ''From the way in which your company have acted I think the Mormons would make good citi- zens, and I would like to have you remain." I told him our duty was to travel through the coun- try and visit with and explain to the people our princi- ples and make friends with them, in anticipation that some of our people would, in time, come into his coun- try and make homes ; that they were now coming this way ; that we had, on our trip found country and report- ed back the same, and that we had received word that several hundred were getting ready to follow upon our tracks to colonize the places already reported. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 269 ''Well," said he, "all you will have to do will be to do as you have done here. When you first came we all thought you bad men. You have stayed here and behaved yourselves in a manner that we now look on you as good men and respect you. You can do the same wherever you go." I replied "Yes, you are right, but it will take a long time. We desire to visit a great many places. I have a good kind wife at home whom I love dearly. I have a number of little children near the ages of yours here. I love them; they are fond of me." He looked at me a moment and then said: "That is so. I understand your feelings and will give you a letter that will introduce you to the Governor, or wherever you go, and you do not need to wait three months to intro- duce yourselves." He gave us the letter, stating that we were gentle- men of good behavior, etc., etc. We bade good-by to our numerous friends and started to Chihuahua in the latter part of March. By this time it was known throughout the state of Chihuahua that Mormon missionaries were in the country. The reception given us by the padre had also been heralded abroad. This caused the more liberal minded to sympathize with us. Wherever we stayed we were kindly treated. We managed to keep posted where to apply and who to avoid. The liberal people notifying us against the rabid Catholics. The first day's travel from the Rio Grande brought us to a station where water was supplied in a large tank. A few soldiers were stationed here as a guard against the Apaches that sometimes raided the ranch. This was an important camping place, being the only water found 270 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. on a 75 mile drive. Grass was plentiful and travelers often camped here for their teams to rest. We were now in a country where our stock would liave to be carefully watched every night. Our custom was to feed grain, hopple the horses and take turns guarding them through the night. It was my turn to go on guard. The animals were eating their corn. Grass was good all around the camp. The night was very dark, the brethren were singing. I got interested in listening and delayed a few minutes attending to the stock. When I went to take charge of them, they were all gone. I gave the alarm. One man remained in camp to keep up the fire and the rest of us spent until midnight hunting, but nothing of our stock could be seen. I went to bed feeling about as miserable as any one ever did. The fault was my own. I had been very -strict; so much so that some of the brethren had felt hurt at times. I had been so careful of all our outfit. Now I felt, after all my strictness I had been the one to lose the stock. Next morninpf we could see bunches of stock in every direction, but ours could not be found. At length Brother Ivins and my son found their trail and followed it some ten miles. They were afoot and the trails showed that the animals were being driven off, so the boys returned and reported. I went to the station to see if I could get help. The commander said it was his business to lend assistance and that he would do all he could for me. I told him I wanted a good horse as I was a trailer. The commander, myself and two others were ready in a short time. Orders were given for five others to follow our trail, bringing water and provisions. We FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 27 1 went to our camp. I told the brethren that I would not return without the stock. The commander wanted to know of me how long I wished to follow the trail. I told him until I got the animals or died trying. He said he never left a trail as long as one man stayed with him. The agreement was if I did not return, the brethren were to hire a team, return to El Paso, and report to Brother Brigham. As soon as we struck the trail the Mexicans decided that the animals had been stolen by Apaches, as we could see plainly that there were barefooted tracks along with ours. The trail was quite plain until we reached a low mountain range. Here the formation was rocky and no trail could be seen. I had taken the lay of the country in the distance and picked out the point where I was satisfied the ani- • mals would have to go. So, while the Mexicans were looking for tracks, I made for this pass. On reaching the summit of the rise the country opened out somewhat level. I made a circuit and soon struck the trail. I was now alone, but on calling the others heard me and soon came in sight. I started on a gallop. One of the party, riding up, overtook and com- plimented me on my ability to trail. As we rode I looked back and saw a signal fire. I asked what it was for. My companion said, ''The cap- tain is now satisfied that the Apaches have your stock, and that is a signal fire for some more men to come on and follow our trail, bringing water, as there is none for three days in this direction." He proposed riding a little slower till the captain came up. I felt more like going faster. There was a clump of cedars in sight in the direc- 272 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. tion we were going. As we neared it the Mexican said, "There are your animals ; the thieves have gone in there and we have got to fight." We looked back, but no one was now in sight. The Mexican asked, ''What shall we do? Will you fight?" I told him I would, if necessary, and for him to take out on one side, keeping out of gun shot, I would go on the other and we would get beyond the cedars and keep the thieves from running the stock off. We were in a wide flat, with mountains on each side. We rode clear round on the run and met. We saw no sign of thieves. Soon five men, with the Mexican cap- tain, came up. We approached the cedars cautiously and found all the animals bunched, but no thieves. We made a care- ful survey of the country and found the tracks of the thieves, where they had gone off in another direction. The captain asked if I wished to follow them. I was too thankful to get the stock, so I told him to let them go ; that they had had their trouble for nothing. We arrived at our camp about sundown, having rid- den nearly forty miles. The commander charged us nothing, but we made the soldiers a present of a few dol- lars, which they accepted very thankfully, as a Mexican soldier serves for almost nothing and boards himself. Our animals were never molested afterward. There was quite a number of teams camped around at the time, and there was considerable interest shown, as most all thought it was the Apaches that had stolen our animals, but it was doubtless thieves who had taken them expecting to get a reward for fetching them back. When we returned, the captain told them it was no use for any one to steal my animals, unless they rolled FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 273 Up the tracks as they went along, for if they did not I would find them. And added that ''the Mormon" was the best trailer he had ever seen. Months after this when hundreds of miles from this place, Mexicans would speak of the circumstance and quote the words of the captain. We were something strange in the country and all our movements and actions were watched and talked about so that wherever we went we found the people seemed to know all about us. CHAPTER XL. The Object of our Mission — Our Arrival at Chihuahua — Our Gener- ous Landlord — We call on the Governor — Interest Aroused Con- cerning us — Interview With Robbers. BEFORE writing any further account of our travels and experiences in Mexico. I will explain as briefly as I can the cause of the mission being called and the expectations entertained by many. The Book of Mormon teaches us that the gospel is to be carried to the remnants, that is, the natives of America (Indians.) The promise is that the natives will receive the gospel and rejoice in it. The census of Mexico shows that there are over six millions of pure blooded Indians or descendants of the ancient races inhabiting this country. Now when this mission was opened a great many became enthusiastic over the prospects and expected great things of us, the first missionaries to Mexico. I remember writing to my wife while in El Paso, referring to this spirit, telling her 17 2 74 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. that many would be disappointed in the mission, but that I should not; that I should be satisfied even if we did not baptize a single person ; that our mission was more as prospectors going through to prepare the way, and that President Young so understood it. We were to be governed by circumstances and not to feel disappointed if we could get to distribute our books and learn about the country and make friendly acquaintance with the people. That was all that would be expected of us on the trip. This was our calling. We were not sent to baptize and organize branches, neither were we forbidden to do so. That was an open question to be decided upon according to the openings made. There were two parties in Mexico, the Catholics and Liberals. We kept our eyes open for the latter as we were always safe with them. When we reached the city of Chihuahua, I desired to find a stopping place with a Liberal. The Liberals of Mexico believe in religious liberty, please don't think they were like Utah Liberals (?). We did not wish to seem partial to either, and did not like to make a direct enquiry. I was well acquainted with the old customs of this place, having lived there for some time, so we drove up near the Catholic cathedral. I knew that any good Catholic, passing in front of the church, would take off his hat, but a Liberal would pass along with his hat on. In 1847, when I was there, all had to take off their hats, or run the risk of getting a good pelting with rocks. But it was not the case in 1876, the time I am now writing about. I soon noticed a large, fine-looking man coming along who did not raise his hat. I asked him to direct us to a good maison or hostelry. I felt sure he would send me to the right place which he did, to the maison FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 275 San Francisco. A maison is a large building with rooms, corrals and stabling where you can rent accommodations and sustain yourself, generally with stores of provisions kept by the proprietor to sell to travelers, connected. On arriving and taking rooms and stables, I went to the landlord and told him we had left 'our money at El Paso, to be expressed to us, and we wished him to credit us for a few days for such provisions and feed as we needed. He said, '' No sir. I will not do that." I was ''stumped" and did not know what to do as we had but a few dollars with us. Our outfit was first class and valuable, and we had not expected to be refused. While I was wondering in my mind what to do, the landlord stepped into a room and soon returned with a large, well-filled pocket book, and handed it to me say- ing, "There is money, take what you want, and when yours comes, you can return it. If I should sell you things on credit, you might think I took advantage of your circumstances and charge you more than if you had money. Take what money you want, look around and buy where you can do the best." I thought how very different from the average white man whether Gentile or Mormon. The landlord proved a true gentleman in every respect, giving us much useful information and treating us kindly during our stay. As soon as we got cleaned up and rested a little, we called upon the governor and presented the letter received from the Jefe Politico of El Paso. He received us kindly, saying that he had heard about us, and laughingly said he had heard of Padre Borajo's speech and hoped we were not so bad as the padre had represented us to be. Governor Ochoa was an intelligent, liberal-minded man and was much respected. His name is still held in 276 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. respectful remembrance in Chihuahua. He was known to be truthful and honest. He was quite learned and understood well the condition of Mexico. After explaining our reasons to him for visiting Mexico, he said he was glad to have us come among them ; that he believed our principles taught to the peo- ple would do them good. He also said that he was well acquainted with the lands of Mexico and would give us all the information he could to help us understand them properly, so we could report correctly to Brigham Young. The governor recommended us to the Jefe Politico of Chihuahua who furnished us the public cockpit to preach in. Printed notices were circulated. The editor of the official paper gave us a favorable notice. In the evening, at the time of meeting, quite a re- spectable congregation had gathered. The cock fighting was still going on, but soon closed. Many persons there at their national sport remained to hear us. As I was the only one who could speak in Spanish, Brother Tenney having gone north, I had to do the preaching. It was quite a task but I knew the native politeness. No Mexican will ever jeer a foreigner if he tries to speak their language. They will listen attentively and try to understand. I understood Spanish quite well, but had never spoken in public and, no doubt, made many blunders. However, our audience seemed pleased. When meeting was over many came and shook hands with us and said they liked what had been preached. One aged blind man who had held a discus- sion with the Bishop of Durango, said he had been preaching our doctrine for years. He showed us a re- port of his discussion. The old fellow, although very poor, had made a name that is known far and wide. No FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 277 one could answer him. He came to our rooms next day and talked for a long while. We gave him some of our books to distribute. He lived at Jabonero, southwest from Chihuahua some two hundred miles. He said the honest people of Mexico would believe our words. The old man manifested a great desire to have us go to his town. I have never heard of him since, but we were all impressed with his honesty. By invitation we visited Gov. Ochoa several times. He explained fully to us the condition of government lands. He said the Mexican government made big offers of land to colonizers, but the fact was, they had no good land; that all desirable tracts for settling were covered by old grants with titles. He desired us to say to Brigham Young that if he wanted lands for his people they must be bought from the owners; and for him not to be deceived by any offers coming from the govern- ment of Mexico. He said their offers were polite and looked pretty on paper, and sounded well when listened to; and he really believed that if they could do as they offered to they would. "The Mexicans are naturally kind and polite, but inasmuch as they have neither land or money," he said laughingly, "you must take the will for the deed." This I reported to Prest. Young on my return home, who received it as a fact, and remarked: "Why should there be good lands left in the heart of Mexico, when they had given out grants clear into California, New Mexico, Arizona and even into this territory?" We remained some three weeks in the city. A great many persons called upon us, some to enquire about our religion with sincere interest, others for mere curiosity. Among our visitors were some notorious robbers from Arizona who visited us often. We could 278 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. not avoid them as they passed for gentlemen, and really acted as such. One was a small, heavy-set Dutchman, who seemed to know all about the big mail robbery on the southern route in 1875, ^^ also about the robbing of Golinsky, of Silver City. The other was a young man from Silver City who robbed an old Dutchman of some fifteen hundred dollars, not far from Mecilla, while they were traveling together. The old man had been to California for five years, had mortgaged his farm, or bought it with a mortgage given as security, he had saved the money to pay up and was on the way home full of joy to meet his wife and children. He had traveled all the way from California on horseback and alone, not even a pocket pistol to protect himself He carried a fifteen hundred draft and some little money. He looked quite poor. No one would have suspected him worth robbing. This young man got in company with the old fellow and they traveled and camped together. The Dutchman confided his good luck to the lad, who could not stand the temptation but made the old man give up ; the boy rode ahead and got across the line, changed his draft and skipped. We saw both while in El Paso. The old man came in hunting the robber, where we heard his story. The young fellow told my son Wiley all about the job, and expressed himself sorry, saying he was of good family but was now ruined for life. In talking to the people we found that many adhered to and respected their ancient traditions. They also retained a respect for their native Hneage. This spirit prevailed strongest among the Liberals. The power of Catholicism had been broken and a new constitution adopted under the leadership of Juarez, who had overcome Maximilian. Juarez was a pure- FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 279 blooded Indian. His most active helpers and the main portion of his army were composed of natives. So at the time we were there it was respectable to be called Indigine, or native. This class received the Book of Mormon readily and manifested much interest in the same. While in Chihuahua we sent out copies of the book, five in a package, to each town and city throughout the republic, wherever there was a mail. The clerks in the post office assisted us for three days. All their spare time they were packing and direct- ing. Each package was directed to the officers of the place with a request to read and distribute them among the people. We sent to all the head officers of the dif- ferent departments a package. I received letters of acknowledgment from some of the principal men. Among the rest Sr. Altamarano, a full-blooded native and a high officer of state; I got several letters from Doctor Rodacanaty professing to have had a vision showing him the truth of the Book of Mormon. 2 8o FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. CHAPTER XLI. We Decided to Visit Guerero — Meetings at Concepcion — We Prepare to Return Home — The Priest at Temosachic — His Kindness to Us — Testimony of a Stranger. AFTER finishing up our work in the city of Chihuahua we decided to visit the western portion of the state. We had received information that a great many natives lived in the Canton de Guerero. This district commences about one hundred and fifty miles west of the city of Chihuahua and extends into the Sierra Madre mountains. The greater portion of the inhabitants of Guerero are natives known as Tarumarie. Many vil- lages of these people are located in the valleys near the mountains. There are many towns and villages that retain the old Indian names. Towns that were there when the Spaniards first came into the country have come under Catholic rule. Cathedrals were built and a few Span- iards settled among the people, mixing with them. (In some settlements most of the mixed blood claim relation- ship to the padres}^ In this way Spanish civilization somewhat modified the habits of the people, but did not do away with them entirely, for in most of these towns pure Tarumaries inhabit districts, retaining all their ancient customs and language. This race of people are much respected throughout the state of Chihuahua, and it is considered rather an honor to be related to them. We concluded to make their country our next stopping place. Bidding good-bye to our friends in Chihuahua, and FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 28 1 particularly to our good old honest governor Antonio Ochoa, we started west. Our route led through a country that was very sparsely settled, owing to the lack of water for irrigation. The city of Chihuahua is located in a rough, barren country, which continues for some thirty-five miles going west. For several days' travel there is nothing very invit- ing to the eye. But on reaching the higher country to- ward the head waters of the Aras river, a tributary of the Yaqui, the country became more inviting. We con- tinued our journey, passing settlements and ranches daily, leaving with each a few books and talking a little with the people near where we camped. Nothing of importance occurred on the road except the mending of one of our horse's hoofs with rawhide. The hoof had been badly cracked for some time. As we were descending a rough, rocky hill the horse stumbled and struck his foot against a boulder so hard that the hoof split clear open up to the hair. We had much diffi- culty in getting him into the settlement a few miles ahead. We offered to sell the horse but could get only one dollar offered for him. We could not well leave him neither had we money to spare to buy another. Mexicans are great people to use rawhide, and I had learned from them to use it in many emergencies. As we were going to bed Brother Pratt remarked : ''Brother Jones why can't you use rawhide on John, (the horse) or does this case beat you ? " The question put me to thinking. So in the morn- ing I obtained a suitable piece of rawhide from a Mexi- can, took the horse to a blacksmith who put some tallow and burnt horn into the opening of the hoof, then seared it with a hot iron. I then took the rawhide and fitted it nicely over the whole hoof, lacing it behind and under- 262 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. neath. The blacksmith fitted a shoe and nailed it on, driving the nails through the rawhide which now formed the outer crust of the hoof. We let the horse stand in a dry place until the next morning when the nails were tightly clinched. We laid over one day to see how this would work, then continued our journey. The horse traveled as though nothing had happened, and finally, when the hide came of? after we had traveled some six hundred miles, the hoof was entirely healed up. This may not be inter- esting, but might be profitable to some, and for that reason I relate the circumstance. On arriving at the village of Concepcion, (the princi- pal town of Guerero,) we enquired for a good place to stop, and were directed to Don Eselso Gonzalez, where we soon made arrangements for the necessary accommo- dations. Don Eselso furnished us good quarters with a large hall attached, had it seated with benches brought from the bull pen which he owned. We held several meet- ings that were well attended and much interest was manifested by some, while all treated us kindly. One man, Francisco Rubio, really understood and believed the Book of Mormon; as once in meeting he took it in his hand and explained it in a more lucid man- ner, especially the part relating to the Savior's appear- ance on this continent, than I had ever heard before. Individually, I received new light from the native. From what I have seen now and then among the natives I sometimes think that the people called Latter- day Saints are only half converted. I have seen and felt more warmth of spirit and faith manifested by natives than I ever saw by white Saints. Even the Apaches told me that they would not wait long for the winding-up FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 283 scene, when they once had power and authority from God to act in His name. That faith, which will yet remove the powers of evil from around the Saints, will come largely from the remnants. I think we will need them in our work and should be looking after them some little and not altogether after money. We deposited our money with Don Eselso. Many times getting articles from his store, and when we went to settle up for house rent and other things, he would not take a cent, but insisted on presenting us with some dried meat and other stuff, jokingly remarking that he could not sell it anyway. While here we visited Arisiachic, the principal Taru- marie town. The trail was very difficult. We were well received. The chief called the people together and we had a long talk with them. They were very much pleased with our visit and hoped we would return some day. We remained in Concepcion about three weeks. Held several meetings which were well attended. Many people visited us to learn of our doctrine. We were fully convinced that many believed in the truth of the Book of Mormon, yet we had no spirit to offer baptism. By this time some of the brethren began to manifest a desire to return home. At first I felt a little disap- pointed, but I can look back now and see that our mis- sion was properly a short one. We were united in one idea, and that was before any great work could be done in this country it would be necessary to colonize among the people. As to the spirit of the people, we all agreed, also, that it was favorable, so it was deemed best that we work our way toward home, visiting the various settle- ments on our way. 284 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. We left many warm-hearted friends at Concepcion, some testifying to having a perfect faith in the Book of Mormon and expressing a strong desire that the Mor- mons would come and dwell among them. On our way home we turned off from the road at Tejoloquechic west to visit the towns of Matachic and Temosachic, the last a place containing some fivQ thous- and inhabitants. The people of these towns received us not only kindly, but many of them manifested great faith in our teachings. They often insisted on giving us some- thing for our books, saying we had a long way to travel and would need something to help us on our journey. At Matachic Tomas Tribosa opened his house to us and we had a large congregation. We talked freely and plainly to the people. Many persons had told us that we would be all right so long as we let the subject of poly- gamy alone; but if that was ever taught the women would knife us. This night, while speaking, I felt impressed to talk on the principle of plurality and explain plainly the doc- trine. There were quite a number of women present. After meeting was dismissed I went to the end of the hall where the women were. Many of them came and shook hands with me and said they would rather their husbands would do as we taught than as many of them did. No one seemed offended in the least. Wherever we held meetings permission had to be first obtained from the civil authorities. When we arrived at Temosachic, the proper officer for granting this license was out of town. A man was sent four miles for him, it not being certain whether he would be found or not. While we were arranging to send a courier, the priest of the settlement came up. He expressed the FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 285 hope that we would be able to find the officer. Said he desired very much to hear us and asked if the padre at Chihuahua had offered his church to us. I told him he had not. He said he wished he had set the example, then he himself could invite us into his church, where a license would not be required ; but he did not like to risk being the first to open a Catholic church building to us. "But," said he, "you must come down tonight (it was now about noon), and I will have a good lot of my people together. There is no law against friends sitting down and talking on a decent subject. I want to ask some few questions if you will answer them." I replied that we would come. We conversed for some time and the padre seemed quite interested. We were camped some three miles away, at the edge of the town. About sundown Brother Pratt and I walked down to the public square where we had appointed to meet the priest. We felt as safe as if at home in Salt Lake City. On arriving, the priest and quite an audience were awaiting us, but there was no word from the officer, so we concluded to sit and chat. A great many pertinent questions were asked and answered. The best of order prevailed and a good feel- ing was manifested. The priest said he would study our book and if he could not understand it he was willing for his people to study, and if they could see good in our doctrine, he wanted them to have the privilege of receiv- ing it. He said that he was now getting old ; that he had always worked for the good of the people, and that he did not want to keep any good thing away from them. Next morning we started back to take up our road for home. We had turned off at Tejoloquechic. On 286 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. reaching there the people had gathered a donation of corn and beans, for us and insisted on our receiving it. We took some but told them we could not haul much. The next place where anything of interest occurred was at Namaquipe, a town on the Upper Santa Maria river. We arrived at this place on Sunday about ten o'clock, intending to spend the day of rest there. We camped in the shade of some cottonwoods near a large ranch house, across the river from the main town. I went to the house to buy some dried meat. I met an old lady who sold me the meat, giving quite a liberal quantity for twenty five cents. I made her a present of one of our books, and went back to camp. Some time after noon this same lady with a very aged companion, came into camp. The old man looked over one hundred years old. We learned that he was a hun- dred and three years. On being seated the old gentleman said^ "You were up to my house this morning." "Yes sir." "You got some meat." "Yes sir." "You paid for it." "Yes sir." I began to think of the lot I had gotten for my money. "You left a little book." "Yes sir." "Did you get pay for it?" "No sir. I did not want pay for the book. We do not sell these books." "Yes, but you paid for the meat. That was not right." Here the old man held the book up and said, "I FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 287 have been reading this book. I understand it and know who you are. You are apostles of Jesus Christ, just the same as Peter, James and John, and I know it. And I also know this book is true." He then turned to his wife and said: "Wife have I not been telling our neighbors for two years past that apostles having the true gospel would come to this land, and that I would live to see them?" We were astonished to hear this testimony, so direct and positive. Don Francisco Vasquez continued and asked us if we intended to return to the country soon. We told him we did not know but we hoped to. He said he would like to be baptized and receive the benefit of the gospel before he died. Next morning when we passed his home he made us take four sacks of corn ; all we could haul. The old man lived to be one hundred and five years old. I visited his family ten years afterwards. The old lady was still alive. She told me that Don Francisco, on his death-bed, called his family around him and told them all to be baptized when the Mormons came. Some forty persons agreed to do so. His oldest son told me the same. They were still hopeful, but how long their hopes will hold out I cannot say. Possibly until the "Liberals" drive us out of this land into Mexico, where the greater number of the remnants live. Then and not till then will we feel the obligation of carrying the words of the Book of Mormon to the Lamanites. Many times, when thinking of this old man and others of the district, I have cried like a child, never having seen, from that day to the present, any dis- position manifested to continue a mission in that part of the country. Of late years I have concluded that the 288 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. people are better as they are than they would be, unless those going among them go with the spirit of true friends and as colonizing missionaries. CHAPTER XLII. Experience at El Valle — We Travel Through a Dangerous Indian Coun- try — Soldiers on the Move — Visit from an ''Old Timer." AFTER leaving Namaquipe the the next place of importance is El Valle. We arrived about noon and halted on the public square. We saw a large crowd collected at a corner store. I took a tin can and told the brethren that if we could not get the privilege of preach- ing here I would get some lard and we would move on. The crowd w^as watching us ; as I approached them I could see that something special was up. I went into the store and inquired where I could find the Alcalde. A man asked: ''What do you want with him?" •T want to get permission to preach here." *T can answer that you cannot; we have all the religion we want. We have held a mass meeting, and the citizens of this place have appointed me to meet you on your arrival and notify you that you can go on. We know who you are and want nothing to do with you." I made no reply ; but turned to the merchant and asked him if he had any lard. At this many of the crowd commenced to laugh and make pleasant remarks, saying that the stranger took it very coolly. The mer- FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 289 chant said he was out of lard and did not know of anyone who had any but Don Pedro who had been talking to me. I asked him if he would sell me some. ''Yes, sir, but it is quite a distance from here to my house; if you wish to go so far with me I will let you have what you want." "All right, I will go with you." When we started most of the crowd followed. Don Pedro commenced talking in a very earnest manner, tell- ing me that they had just received a letter from the Pope warning all Catholics against false prophets, etc., and that they were all fully prepared beforehand to reject our heresies. He kept up his talk until we arrived at his house. He now got a pamphlet and commenced reading. This was the printed circular of the Pope. I listened patiently until my opponent finished. The house, a large one, was crowded, nearly a hundred persons present. I now asked permission to answer the Pope's letter and explain our side. Don Pedro objected. My reply settled him. I told him I had been much in Mexico and mixed among the people a great deal and I had always found them mannerly and polite, especially to strangers and in their own house. That I was now under his roof and protec- tion — a stranger — and appealed to him as a true Mexican gentleman to hear me. At this many of the crowd said, "Let the stranger speak." Don Pedro now consented, but soon interrupted me. I reminded him that I had listened to him in perfect silence, and unless he did the same I should claim to be more of a gentleman than he was. This made quite a laugh, and the voice was for me to have the floor uninter- ruptedly. 18 290 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. In brief I will say that I fully satisfied myself; spoke with perfect freedom and handled the priests and Pope without gloves. When I got through Don Pedro said his whole opinion was now changed, asked for a book, saying he would read and study it whether the priests liked it or not. When we left all was friendly. The district of country we had been passing through appeared to be the most desirable for colonizing. We made diligent enquiries about lands, titles, conflicting water interests and making notes, all of which were reported to Prest. Young on our arrival home. As we neared the frontier settlements there was great excitement as the Apaches were out on the war path and had killed some men near Fort Bowie. They had had a fight with the soldiers and whipped them, and were now raiding the country in every direction. Some of the officials at Galiana talked of stopping us from going any further. But we were very anxious to continue on so we told them we would be careful and not run into danger. "' After leaving Casas Grandes our road was really lonesome and dangerous. It was some three days' travel to Cow Springs before we would see a ranch. However, we made the trip without accident, traveling the most dangerous parts in the night time. One night we had our nerves sorely tried. My intention was, if we ever met the Apaches, to approach them alone, believing I could make peace with them the same as I had done before with other Indians. While traveling along one night. Brother Ivins and my son riding ahead of the wagon, our little watch dog that had been of great service to us many times, gave notice that someone was approaching in the road. I called to the boys to stop. I went and got on my FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 29 1 son's horse, telling him to go back to the team. Brother Ivins and I rode on a short distance. The night was rather dark, but soon we saw a lot of what appeared to be savage-looking Indians coming. They were on foot and armed. They halted on seeing us. I told Brother Ivins to go back to the wagon and I would go and meet them, and if they shot me, he and the others must jump into the brush and try and save their lives as best they could. I got off from my horse and walked up to the Indians, who stood in a group, filling the road. As I approached alone they did not seem to make any move whatever. I spoke, saluting them in Spanish. They answered all right. I offered them my hand and they all shook hands with me. I asked them where they were going. They said down to their homes and asked where I was going. I told them I was going to my home a long way off in the northern country. Thus we kept asking and answering questions till one asked why we were travel- ing by night. I told them that my companions were afraid of them, but that I was not for I was a friend to the Indians and did not believe they would ever kill me. They began to laugh and asked me who I thought they were. I asked, ''Are you not Apaches ? " "No, senor, we are not Apaches," they answered, "but like you we are traveling in the night because we are afraid of them." I now called to my companions who had been wait- ing in suspense. All my bravery and fortitude were wasted, further than to prove to myself that I was willing to stand the test. We had a good long talk with these Indians who 292 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. were of the Opitas, a people similar to the Pimas, and who live in the foothills of the Sierra Madre in Sonora. As we neared the frontier ranches on the American side we found that the Apache war was a reality. We camped at Cow Springs. Much apprehension was felt at Burro Sienega. Here we met Mr. Connor whom we had met on the trip down. His father and brother were killed shortly after at this ranch. We heard that soldiers were concentrating at Bowie with orders to capture and take all the Apaches to the San Carlos reservation. Apache signal fires could be seen in the mountains south of Bowie. Our route now led through the most perilous part of the country; hun dreds of people having been killed along this road in past years, our feelings were to put our trust in God and go on. We arrived at San Simon where a lot of " hard cases" were camped. It was a question whether we were safer with them than alone; but they were afraid and felt better while we were with them. Next day was the ''teller." If we could make Bowie all right, our chances would be better from there on as troops were en route to that post from Camps Verde, McDowell and Apache. Our day's travel from San Simon to Bowie was one of anxiety, but we made it in safety. We decided to take a different route on our return from the one traveled going down. So, on leaving Bowie, instead of taking the main road back to Tucson, we decided to go by the way of Fort Grant, Camp Thomas, Camp Apache and on to the upper Little Colo- rado. The road from Camp Thomas to Camp Apache was reported to us as almost impassable for wagons, none having attempted the trip for some three years past. The troops moved across the mountains with pack ani- mals. However, we concluded to try it. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 293 From Bowie to Camp Grant there was a drive of nearly seventy-five miles without water. We made the most of the distance in the afternoon and night. On turning out our teams just before day, they were too thirsty to eat the grass, it being somewhat dry. We only had about two gallons of water, which we had kept for drinking and cooking. On seeing the condition of our poor animals we took most of the water and wet up some bran we happened to have, giving a little to each animal. They ate it with a relish, then started for the grass, eating heartily for some time, when we hitched up and made the rest of the distance in good time. Since this experience, when traveling through desert country I have made it a rule to carry a sack of bran. When water becomes scarce wet a feed of bran with one half gallon of water and it will do as much good on the last end of a hard drive as three times the water without bran. Troops were being massed at Camp Grant. The orders were for all the Apaches to move to San Carlos, the greater portion being willing to do so. The Chiri- cahuis had not yet decided to come in. There were a number of scouts camped here. We laid over for a few days as we had a desire to learn something about these Indians and the condition of affairs before going on. We managed to get acquainted with some of the leaders. They came to our camp and talked most of one night. As I intend to devote a whole chapter to Apache history, I will then relate our conversation with these Indians, which was very interesting to all of us. From Camp Grant to Camp Thomas we passed numbers of Indian camps. They would try to look sav- 294 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. agely at us, but I could always get a friendly look before quitting them. We had heard much about the Upper Gila Valley, the country settled now mostly by our people. Before arriving at the river crossing we fell in company with an intelligent Mexican who lived in Pueblo Viejo. He gave us such full and satisfactory information about the coun- try that we concluded to make our report from it and not spend any time exploring. While in camp on the Gila river, on our return home, we met an old-timer, who related to us some of his personal history. I was so much interested in the story that I have concluded to give it to the readers of this book. CHAPTER XLIII. Narrative of our Visitor's Life — His Early Studies and Aspirations — His Marriage to a Deceitful Wife — He Flees to California — His Wife Assumes Repentance and he Returns to her — Further Hypocrisy. ABOUT noon, while we were in camp, a gentleman, apparently some forty-five years of age, came down the trail from the mountains. His outfit consisted of two fine looking mules, sleek and fat, with all his traps neatly packed. His riding rig and arms were all of the best; his blankets and clothing clean and neat. The owner himself was a large-sized, fine-looking man, and in every way presented the appearance of a gentleman. We were near the road and as from the direction he FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 295 had come and the hour being noon, it was natural to suppose that he would make camp. We invited him to stop and share our shade tree with us. Politeness and hospitality can be, and often is, extended in the camp of the traveler as well as in the abode of a dweller. As the stranger unsaddled we noticed his move- ments were graceful. His mules were perfectly gentle and seemed to understand their master's kindness to them. This captured me individually, for if there are more unpardonable sins allowed than are on the list, and it was my duty to furnish another, I believe I would hand in "cruelty to dumb brutes." I have seen men who are considered both good and great by some people — themselves included — who would get angry with their animals and beat them in a cruel, senseless manner, even showing a murderous spirit. I have always believed that such persons would serve human beings the same way when in anger, only they are too cowardly to take the immediate consequences. Our visitor accepted our invitation to dinner. We soon found that he was an ''old-timer," having been in California and the west for many years. We insisted on his resting over Sunday with us and, finally, he con- sented. Our conversation led on from one thing to another until our new acquaintance became quite communicative. His conversation was very interesting, as he had trav- eled a great deal in the west. He had visited Salt Lake City and knew many places and people that were famil- iar to us. Finally, he gave us his name and related the following story, as near as I can remember it : He was a native of one of the Middle States. Was left an oi*phan with a small fortune, some thirty thousand dollars. His disposition was to make the best use pos- 296 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. sible of his time and money. After finishing at the com- mon schools he attended an eastern college, studying medicine, etc. While at college he was allowed a stipulated amount for pocket money. This was always used pru- dently, but not stingily, allowing himself all the pleasures he desired, such as would be proper in good society ; but never spending a cent in vices of any kind. At the same college there were a great many young men, sons of "well-known capitalists. Many of these wealthy young men did not have occasion, seemingly, to spend any more money than did our friend ; but many of them were addicted to habits that soon emptied their purses, and they would have to borrow, sometimes com- ing to the ''Doctor" (as we will now call him). Now, inasmuch as these rich young fellows were often "broke," whilst the Doctor always had money and to loan, and at the same time never showed any penuri- ousness, it became rumored that he was immensely wealthy. This he knew nothing about, as he was rather retiring in his disposition and did not take part in the gossips of the day. As time went on he found himself becoming very popular and sought after, being invited to parties, balls, receptions, etc. He thought nothing strange of this, as he met others whom he knew to be his inferiors, although much wealthier. Money influence never entered his mind, as he felt content with his little fortune, believing that, with a good profession and his start, he would be independent. His mind was at ease. He neither looked for a money-match or supposed that he was a ''catch" for anyone. Like all other places, this, where the Doctor was, had its belle — the handsomest, sweetest-dispositioned, FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 297 most unselfish and kind-hearted divinity upon earth. All the young bloods were in love with her. This was before people got "mashed." Of course, she treated them all so nicely that each fool thought he was the favored one. All divinities do this, I am told. The Doctor, according to his own words, really fell in love with this she-angel. She returned his affection with compound interest — in her eye. The courtship was all that two fond hearts could wish, as the Doctor's purse was, as before described, always equal to the occasion. All envied his success, yet respected his character and perseverance. Everything looked bright. So the Doctor applied himself to his studies with double vigor, looking forward to the happy day when, with his diploma and his beauti- ful, intelligent, loving wife, he could go to his home and old friends and settle down to business, with as bright a future as ever man hoped for. After graduating, the wedding soon followed. Everything went off in proper shape, no lack of means being in the way. The Doctor never asked or cared what the bride's fortune was ; her heart and love were all the dowry he wanted. Having given his fullest and purest love, he fully believed that hers was as fully returned. I do not recollect just where this occurred; but this much I do remember, that, after the wedding, the Doctor took his bride aboard a boat and started for home, sup- posing she understood his intentions, as he had talked of nothing else but their future home and happiness. On arriving at a point where they took a convey- ance, in a different direction to what the lady expected, she asked : ■* ''Where are you going?" The Doctor replied, "This is our way to — " 298 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. *'Why, are you not going to Europe on a wedding tour?" ''Well, no; I had not thought of that. We are going home. We cannot well afford a trip across the ocean ; besides, I am anxious to get home and attend to business." This occurred in the presence of many persons. The divinity (?) flew into a terrible rage, asked him who he was that business called him home, and that he could not afford a wedding tour. In relating this the Doctor seemed to go through the whole scene in his feelings, the tears often showing in his eyes. He did not pretend to relate all that had been said. Imagination can only picture his feelings when he learned that there was no love, that all was mercenary on her part, and as he never had in any way meant deception, it was a cruel blow. But like a true man he decided at once and took her back home ; offered her a divorce which she refused. He gave her most of his fortune and started for California, probably as sad a man as ever crossed the plains. While in California he was prospered and soon accumulated quite a fortune. After a time his wife seemed to repent of her cruelty to him. Wrote him kind and loving letters, asking forgiveness and excused herself for her unnatural conduct, by saying it was on account of her ill-health. The Doctor, with kind-hearted simplicity finally believed her and returned. She had spent the most that had been given her. The doctor now commenced anew, with all his former hopes and aspirations rebuilt as much as possible. All went well for awhile. Two children were born and the doctor really felt FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 299 happy. But all was sham and hypocrisy with his wife. She was now acting so as to get hold of his money and property. At length another scene was enacted. The doctor was told all that was wanted of him was his' money. A divorce was again offered and urged. The lady refused, but declared it her intention to hunt him wherever he went, till the day of his death, and get all she could out of him, using the children as a means of working upon his honor and her rights as wife, to demand all she possibly could. The Doctor again left for the west, leaving all his property. For many years his whole aim had been to keep track of the condition of his children, and send money for their education to a trusted agent ; and keep himself hidden from the knowledge of his wife. In doing this he had become a wanderer upon the earth, but he was still a gentleman. I learned more about this man afterwards — of his private business. He was quite a successful prospector. But few if any ever heard this story from his lips, except ourselves. And as it was not given me for publication, I have given no names. Like this man there are thousands in the far west who carry, in their bosoms, facts that would be far more interesting than the average fictitious romance. 300 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. CHAPTER XLIV. We Meet Leading Brethren in Arizona — Arrival Home — Incorrect Reports Concerning Me — My Horse ''Tex" — Meeting With President Young — He Accepts Our Labors. WE FOUND the road from the Gila to Camp Apache to be most of the way about the roughest any of us had ever seen. It was all we could possibly do to get over some of the rough places, but finally made the trip without break or accident. The country in and around Camp Apache is quite picturesque. Grass, timber, small streams and springs were quite plentiful from here to Cooley's ranch, and the country is pleasant to travel through. At Cooley^s we were hospitably entertained and given much useful information. From him we learned the con- dition of the new settlements being made on the Little Colorado, under the leadership of Lot Smith and Brothers Allen, Lake and Ballinger. We now felt some- what satisfied with our trip, realizing that we had been the most successful prospectors into the land of Arizona, our reports having been received and acted upon. The greater portion of the settlements in Arizona, New Mexico and Old Mexico are on lands explored by our party on this trip. From Cooley's ranch we followed down the country to Stinson's farm, now Snowflake. Mr. Stinson had also visited the Mormon camps and spoke highly of their labors. It was now June. As we neared the settlements we felt a feeling of joy at the thought of meeting friends from home. On arriving at Allen's camp we met Prest. Wells, Apostles E. Snow and B. Young with several others, just FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 3OI from the settlements of Utah. Here we learned of the death of Bishop Roundy by drowning. I was glad to meet the brethren. Brothers Stewart, Pratt and Ivins had expressed a desire to return home. I had intended to go with my son Wiley to where we supposed Brothers Smith and Tenney were still laboring, but here learned that they had gone home. Prest. Wells advised me to go home. I told him I hated to return just then, saying that I did not feel as though I had filled my mission. He addressed me a little sharply, speaking as though he did not believe me and telling me I had better go in with his company. Whether Brother Wells believed me or not I was willing to stay if left to follow my own feelings, but I did as he advised. On the way I noticed a disposition to treat me rather coolly, many times being snubbed when offering some information about our trip. I could not understand this very well at the time. On arriving at Lot Smith's camp I met my daughter, Mary, and her husband, J. Jordan. They had been called to assist in settling this country. My son, Wiley, remained a short time with them, then came on to Fair- view, our home. The trip in from the Little Colorado was not very pleasant to me ; the mode of travel was so dif- ferent from what I had been accustomed to that I was continually out of humor. My mode of traveling was and still is to watch and take care of my stock, and give it all the advantages possible. I have always been able to go over country successfully with a common outfit, while I have heard of others, much better fitted up, failing. We had made a trip of near four thousand miles and were now returning with the same animals we started with, some of them in better condition than when 302 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. we left. Instead of getting credit for this, I learned, after- wards, that reports had been circulated to the effect that I was tyrannical and unjust, and these statements, doubt- less, had their influence upon my friends. Nothing was said to me on the road about these reports, but I could see that something was "out of joint" from the treat- ment I received, which could not be particularly defined, but just such as would indicate indifference to me. Finally, it became so disagreeable that I concluded to travel alone ; so I came on the last two days without a bite to eat, rather than be subject to the annoyances in the company with which I was then traveling. I got in thirty-six hours ahead of the rest. The last day, crossing the Buckskin Mountain, I got quite hungry and thirsty. I had about a quart of corn that I intended to eat, but saved and fed it to my faithful little horse, ''Tex," that had carried his rider, my son Wiley, already some three thousand five hundred miles. "Tex" was in good condition and I had taken him to ride in from Little Colorado home. I would not do justice unless I mentioned this horse for he was the most reliable animal I ever knew. I gave him all the corn. I had a three pint canteen of water, when I was taking a drink "Tex" came up and licked the canteen and looked at me as though he wanted a taste. I set my hat on the ground, sinking the crown so as to form a dish then poured a little water in, then the horse would sup it up. I gave him the last drop although I was then dry and had a big half day's ride yet to make before getting to Johnston's settlement. After baiting I saddled up, arriving at Navajo Wells about one hour by sun. There was some squaws water- ing their horses. I got them to give "Tex" a little water, but it was too filthy for me to drink. There I FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 303 again baited half an hour then got on my horse telling him how hungry and thirsty I was and that I had given him all the advantage and now it was but fair for him to take me in twelve miles in a hurry. This he did in fine style scarcely breaking the gallop all the way. I met President Young at Kanab. He was glad to see me and hear the report from Mexico. Brother Young was a true friend to me and understood my dis- position. He never allowed anyone to speak against me ; he knew my faults, also some of my virtues. One that he always appreciated was my stubbornness ; when I started on a trip, I had always stuck to it. I said nothing to him about my annoyances. Brother Brigham expressed himself well satisfied with the results of our trip; said it was an opening for a greater work. I reported all the brethren good and faithful, doing honor to those we represented. I never knew until coming to Salt Lake that there was any dis- satisfaction. I knew we had differed in our opinions sometimes about standing guard, but as I always took my turn and sometimes more, I never dreamed of anyone holding ill-feelings for being required to stand guard. I think that these reports, and what grew out of them, have affected that mission and do to this day. Time will bring all things right. Many strange things are permitted that we cannot see any use in at the time, that afterwards turn to be a blessing. 304 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. CHAPTER XLV. A Colonizing Mission to Mexico — I Prefer to be Relieved — My Wish not Granted — The Company who Volunteered — Our Start from St. George — Parting with President Young. I ARRIVED home about the ist of July, 1876, found my family all well; I settled down to work at once making saddle-trees, as they were in good demand, and my family needed the help they would bring. I had been at home about one month when I received a note from President Young requesting me to come to the city as he wished to talk to me about the Mexican missions. On meeting President Young in the city he said, '*I would like to have you pick a few families and take charge of them and go into the far south and start a settlement. Would you like to do it?" I answered, "Yes, I will go." ''Whom would you like to go with you ? I want the settling to stick, and not fail." I replied, " Give me men with large families and small means, so that when we get there they will be too poor to come back, and we will have to stay." He laughed and said it was a good idea. While in Salt Lake receiving instructions from President Young and preparing to go on the colonizing mission, I heard for the first time of the hard stories told against me. There is one thing I would like to say that I think should be considered by all Latter-day Saints, and that is, few men, possibly none, ever made an overland trip of four thousand miles over deserts and through the most dangerous country on the continent and got through without some little "family jars." FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 305 There had been attempts made to explore the south- ern country that had practically failed. President Young had expressed confidence in my ability to make the trip and so I felt determined to do my best. I knew that our little mules and ponies were our dependence, for if we had lost them we might have per- ished, or at least suffered great hardships as well as los- ing time. And more still I realized the success or failure of our trip would have a great effect upon others who might follow after. All this made me extremely careful. One fault I have always had, and with all my expe- rience in life it still hangs to me, that is, anything that is clear to my understanding to be right I naturally think others ought to see the same. It was so on this trip. I naturally thought every man understood as well as I did the importance of taking care of our outfit. I was so much discouraged at the effects of these reports that I felt as though I never wanted to take charge of another mission of any kind. I wrote a note to President Young, asking him to appoint someone else to take charge and I would go along as guide and inter- preter. President Young paid no attention to my sugges- tion. I went to Brother Woodruff and asked him to speak to Brother Brigham on the subject; instead of doing which he told me I was wrong to notice these reports, and that all men who were called to do a good work met opposition. I told him that I really believed it would be a mis- take to put me in charge of the colony ; that I had been used to doing hard service so much that I had gotten in the habit of being arbitrary, and I was afraid I would not have patience to act as a presiding Elder should. Brother Woodruff said he believed I was honest and 19 306 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. sincere, and he would speak to Brother Brigham on the subject. On visiting Brother Young, he said he wanted me to go ahead ; that an angel could not please everybody. And added: "You know how to travel, how to take care of teams. You are better acquainted with the roads, the country, the natives and their language, and are bet- ter prepared to take charge of a company than any one I know of. Go ahead and do the best you can. When you get things started we can send some 'good' man to take your place, and you can go on and open up more new country. This is your mission." With this understanding I went to work with a will to get ready for the trip. I still felt quite sore about the stories circulated, for they were not just. But one thing I had to acknowledge that made me a little careful what I said to Brother Brigham. He had warned me against one of the company who had volunteered to go. He advised me not to take him, saying that he would try to take the mission away from me and would make me trouble. This I should have listened to ; but the man seemed so earnest and desirous to go that I pled for him, and Brother Young finally consented. I was served just right. Brother Brigham spoke truly. Anyone doubting it can investigate for themselves ; I have said all I wish to about the matter. Brother Brigham said he wanted volunteers ; that no one would be called unless he was perfectly will- ing, otherwise rather desired them not to go. The following names, with their families, were soon enrolled for the mission : P. C. Merrills, Dudley J. Mer- rills, Thos. Merrills, Adelbert Merrills, Henry C. Rogers, George Steel, Thomas Biggs, Ross R. Rogers, Joseph McRae and Isaac Turley. Notice was given that we FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 307 would meet at St. George about Christmas and there organize, President Young intending to winter there. I had to work hard and make many shifts and trades to get an outfit sufficient to move my family in comfort. I was a little late in starting on the road. P. C. Merrills and his family overtook us at Sevier Bridge. We traveled together to St. George. On arriving there we found all the company in camp in a school-house yard, with the privilege of using the house when needed in case of storm. It was now about the first of January and the weather was quite disagreeable. Here a Brother Williams joined us. On looking over the outfit I soon found that many of the wagons were overloaded and that much of the loading being taken could be dispensed with. I advised the selling off of such as old stoves, sewing machines and many other heavy articles ; but no one seemed to think but what they could pull their load. My loading consisted of bedding, clothing, provi- sions, horse feed and such articles as were absolutely necessary. We had not ten pounds of anything that could be dispensed with. I considered it my duty to set the example, knowing that we had a hard trip before us and could not afford to haul anything but the actual necessities with the outfit on hand. I spoke to Brother Brigham about the situation. He said, ''Get your company in the best shape you can and as soon as possible move out. There is a nice little settlement, Santa Clara, on your road. There is a beautiful piece of sandy road from here to there, just such as will help you get the brethren to see the impor- tance of lightening up. When you get there you can set up an auction store. The people are pretty well off and will be able to buy what you have to sell." 308 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. When all was ready we started out, and, as Presi- dent Young said, when we got into the Santa Clara set- tlement many of the company were not only willing but anxious to lighten up. The people of Santa Clara traded readily for the stuff, paying dried fruit, grain and some money. Some- times the loading traded for was as heavy as that traded off. Brother Isaac Turley, who had traveled a portion of the road and who was an experienced traveler, was elected wagon-master. He advised the people not to be afraid to trade for corn, saying that he was willing to roll at a wheel to help get a sack of corn over a hard place, but did not like to strain his back to move an old stove along that was not worth hauling. At this place we bade good-bye to President Young, who drove out to see us. He gave us his blessing and a few words of counsel. This was the last time I ever saw Brother Brigham — to me the best and greatest man I have ever known. Our instructions were to go into the southern coun- try and settle where we felt impressed to stop. The intention was to go on to Mexico eventually. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 3O9 CHAPTER XLVI. We Locate on Salt River — Letter from President Young — We Com- mence Work on our Ditch — Hire Indians to help us — My Associ- ations with the Red Men. WE passed down the Virgin river, crossed the Colorado at Stone's Ferry, then through Mineral Park, Walapai Valley, Cottonwood, Anvil Rock, Oaks and Willows and Walnut Creek, leaving Prescott to the left. We continued on the most direct route into Salt River valley. The trip was made without losing an animal or suf- fering in any way worth mentioning ; in fact, to this day many of the company speak of the trip as one of pleas- ure rather than suffering. Everything was under strict discipline. No one can travel safely through a wild, dangerous country and be neglectful, no matter what those may say who are too lazy to stand guard without grumbling. One incident of the trip I will relate that might be profitable in putting others -on their guard. One day, while traveling through a hilly, broken country, my son Wiley and Chas. Rogers, both young lads, took their guns for a hunt. It was cloudy; I warned them not to go far from the road. This they intended to obey, but soon after they left the train the road turned off to the right and changed the direction. It soon com- menced to storm very hard, and we went into camp. We were now uneasy about the boys. The storm was the first of the season — cold and wet, and the boys were without their coats. I tried to keep from showing anxiety for their mothers' sake ; but I felt about as much con- 3IO FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. cerned as I ever did, for I knew there was great danger. About night I went on to a high hill, piled up several cords of dried cedars and set fire to them. About 9 o'clock we heard a loud hello. We knew they were coming. They were almost dead with fatigue. After finding they were lost they had traveled round and round to keep from freezing to death. Their strength had almost failed when they saw the light. They had no matches, but were trying to strike fire with their guns, when the light was visible from where they were. There was quite a mountain ridge between them and the fire. It was in a different direction from where they expected ; it had barely shown a dim light in the mountain top. Wiley said, "That's pa!" and started for the fire. This saved them. On arriving at Salt river it became plain to see that we were not in a condition to go further, and, as every- thing seemed inviting to us to stop here, we took a vote on the question of continuing. All voted to locate on Salt river, except one man. We made camp where Mr. Miller had directed me to the ditch site. Next morning we commenced work on the head of the ditch. Ross R. Rogers began surveying the ditch with a straight-edge and spirit-level. We had been to work but a few hours, when a party came and claimed that we were on a ditch site already staked and owned. Mr. Miller had posted me on this. The survey had been made and stakes set, but suffi- cient work had not been done to hold the right of way. So I told the gentleman in charge of the party that we would not interfere with his survey ; that we had noticed his stakes and would not disturb them. He finally offered to sell us the right of way. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 3 II I told him we were not prepared to buy, but would try and be careful not to interfere with his rights. The party left and we heard no more from them. We arranged affairs to the best advantage possible, according to the wisdom we had, and went to work on what was registered and is known as the Utah ditch. On reporting to President Young, the following letter was received : ''Salt Lake City, U. T. ''Elder D. W. Jones, Camp Utah, Arizona. "Dear Brother: — On my return from Ogden, last evening, I found your note awaiting me. The brethren who have been called to go to Arizona reside in various parts of this territory. They will start as they get ready and come dropping in upon you from time to time, with- out any special instructions from the Presidency of the Church, only to commence their labors at as early a date as they reasonably can. For this reason we cannot say anything about making arrangements beforehand for their flour ; but they will have to do as we have done before — get it as best they may after their arrival. ** We should be pleased to learn from you how far you consider it from your camp to the settlements on the Little Colorado river, and which road you deem the best thereto. We should also like to know what your intentions are with regard to settling the region for which you originally started. We do not deem it prudent for you to break up your present location, but possibly next fall you will find it consistent to continue your journey with a portion of those who are now with you, while others will come and occupy the places vacated by you. '*We do not, however, wish you to get the idea 312 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. from the above remarks that we desire to hurry you away from where you now are, or to force a settlement in the district to which you refer, until it is safe to do so and free from the dangers of Indian difficulties; but we regard it as one of the spots where the Saints will, sooner or later, gather to build up Zion, and we feel the sooner the better. "Last evening I returned from Cache valley, where I had been resting a few days. Tomorrow myself and party start for Juab and Sanpete counties to organize a Stake of Zion there, while Brothers Lorenzo Snow and Franklin D. Richards will go to Morgan and Summit counties and organize there. "We have thus to divide or we should not get through with the organization of the Stakes in time to commence the quarterly conferences in those that were first organized. "We have no special counsel to give you or your company at present, only to live so as to retain within you the Spirit of the Lord, that it may be to you a present helper in every time of need, and a guide that can be called upon on all occasions. Be prudent in all the measures you enter into; economical with your time and supplies; be just one towards another, and kind and friendly with all men; do your utmost by precept and example to win the hearts of the Lamanites, and ever use the influence you acquire over them for good, for their salvation and education in the arts of peace and industry. In this course the blessing of the Lord will be with you, and you shall be established in peace, and prosperity shall attend your efforts to build up God's kingdom. That this may be so is the prayer of "Your brother in the Gospel, "Brigham Young." FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 3I3 We commenced on the ditch March 7th, 1877. All hands worked with a will. Part of the company moved down on to lands located for settlements. Most of the able-bodied men formed a working camp near the head of the ditch, where a deep cut had to be made. We hired considerable help when we could procure it for such pay as we could command, as scrub ponies, ''Hayden scrip," etc. Among those employed were a number of Indians, Pimas, Maricopas, Papagoes, Yumas. Yaquis and one or two Apaches Mojaves. The most of them were good workers. Some of these Indians expressed a desire to come and settle with us; this was the most interesting part of the mission to me and I naturally supposed that all the company felt the same spirit, but I soon found my mistake, for on making this desire of the Indians known to the company many objected, some saying that they did not want their families brought into association with these dirty Indians. So little interest was manifested by the company that I made the mistake of jumping at the conclusion that I would have to go ahead whether I was backed up or not; I learned afterwards that if I had been more patient and faithful that I would have had more help, but at the time I acted according to the best light I had and determined to stick to the Indians. This spirit manifested to the company showing a preference to the natives, naturally created a prejudice against me. Soon dissatisfaction commenced to show. The result was that most of the company left and went onto the San Pedro in southern Arizona, led by P. C. Merrill. After this move, there being but four families left, and one of these soon leaving, our little colony was quite weak. The three families remaining with me professed to 314 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. sustain my management for a little season. Then they turned more bitter against me than those who went away; no doubt but they felt justified in their own feel- ings, and, as I am writing my own history and not theirs, I will allow them the same privilege. It was not long until it became manifest that I would have to either give up the Indians or lose my standing with the white brethren. I chose the natives, and will now give as truthful a history of my labors among them as my memory will serve. In about six weeks from the time we commenced we had sufficient water out to plant some garden stuff and a few acres of corn. When this was done Brother Turley took a number of teams and went to freighting for Mr. Hayden to pay the debt we had now made — some fifteen hundred dollars. This debt could soon have been paid if all hands had stayed together, but as the most left, the debt finally fell upon me to finish paying up. This tied me up on Salt river for some time. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 315 CHAPTER XLVII. Deceit of my Interpreter — Indians Apply for Baptism — Some True- hearted Natives Receive the Ordinance — Help Given on our Ditch by the Pimas and Maricopas — The U. S. Agent Forbids my Interfering with the Indians. AS often as opportunity offered I talked to the Indians. As yet I had not found an interpreter that suited me ; several whom I had met the year before had not come to our camp yet, their homes being some dis- tance away. The interpreter I used, Geo. Roberts, was something of an adventurer, as the sequel will show. I was at work one day in a field, planting, after we had been settled for some six weeks, when my interpre- ter came to me and said there were several of the lead- ing men of the Salt river Pimas who wished me to come down to my camp, where they were, and baptize them. I told him I did not think the Indians understood enough to be baptized ; that I had not had time to teach them sufficiently. He said I had talked a great deal to him ; that he understood and believed all I said, and fully explained all my words to these capitancillos (little cap- tains), who also believed and wished baptism. I did not feel satisfied. I have always been slow to baptize natives ; my policy has been to teach them first, so that they would fully realize what they were doing. I have endeavored more to get them out of their degrada- tion and savagery. When I met these Indians I asked them (using the interpreter) what they desired. They said they wished to be baptized and be Mormons. I told the interpreter to say to them that I did not want them to be baptized until they fully understood what baptism was for. I 3l6 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. continued talking, explaining what the requirements were, etc. The interpreter insisted, after talking quite a while with the chiefs, that they fully understood me and were ready. I then told him to say to them: ''Go back to your camp; talk with your head chief and your people, and explain these things. Take time to reconsider and do not be in a hurry to get baptized." A few days after this my interpreter again came to me and said many hundred Indians had come to my camp (I was again at work away from home), all ready and wanting to be baptized. I was now sorely puzzled, for there was nothing in reason to convince me that these ignorant natives were really subject to such sudden conversion. Still, I knew that our people looked forward to a time when a nation will be born in a day, but I did not believe that time had come ; yet it looked a little that way, so I went down. On arriving at camp there were Indians in every place and direction ; there were between three and four hundred, all looking pleasant and smiling. The chiefs were grouped, sitting quietly and sedately. I commenced to talk to and question them, repeat- ing what I had formerly said and added more, and in every way endeavored to fasten upon their minds the responsibility of being baptized. I really desired to deter them, if possible, for I had no faith in the reality of the situation. But my interpreter, who talked at length to them, professing to explain all my words, insisted that they fully understood and wanted to be baptized — the whole tribe included. Several Elders were present, and I asked, "What shall I do? I have no faith in this. There is something wrong." FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 317 All said I had done my duty ; if they insisted, all we could do was to baptize them, as we had no right to refuse. I told the Indians all right — we would go to the river. At this all hands started pell-mell, the young ones laughing and playing, the older ones more sedate. As I started to the river I observed a strange Indian looking intently at me. He was dressed differently from the rest. I asked him if he understood Spanish. He answered, "Yes, perfectly." ''Have you heard and understood the talk with the Pimas?" ''Yes, sir; and the Indians are deceived. Your interpreter is either dishonest or does not understand you ; I hardly know which, but I think it is a little of both. He talks considerable Spanish, but he has not fully understood you. I fully understand and want ta help you." "Will you go with me now? — and I will again talk to them." "Yes." On the way to the river my new friend informed me that the main inducement offered for baptism by my interpreter was, that to all who would be baptized I would give a new shirt; and to the men of families who had no land I would give lands. So it was no wonder at the number of converts. When we got to the river bank I called the principal men together and taught them for a long time, fully explaining the true situation and requirements. The old chief, Chiacum, said he thought I must have lots of shirts and had looked around wondering where all my land was. My interpreter looked rather "sheepish." When all was explained the old chief said he did not 3l8 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. fully understand all I had said, but one thing he under- stood and was willing to try — that baptism required one to be a better man. Said he, "I am willing to be baptized and listen to your talk, for I believe it is good. I will seek to be a better man and try to learn more about God. Now here are three of us who are willing to do this; if this will do you can baptize us, we do not want any shirts; we will then try to learn and teach your words to our people, and when they are ready we will tell you and you can baptize them. I now felt satisfied and baptized the old chief and the ones he named, feeling a real joy for I knew they were honest. This deception of my first interpreter had its effect that reaches far into the future. Believing on the start that he would be useful to me, I had given him a piece of land near by camp, where he had been doing a little work. I now felt so disappointed in him that I wished to get rid of him. He said if he got his pay for the land he would leave. This he received in full, and I thought I would hear no more of him. In this, too, I was disap- pointed. Often during the spring and summer natives visited our camp enquiring about our people and principles. I heard that the "shirt and land" story had reached quite a distance. One party of Maricopas, fourteen in number, headed by an old chief, Malia, came to see us. They were very poor and destitute, but seemed more intelligent than the average. I was very busy, being obliged to go away from camp. The old chief said they were willing to help me, and insisted that I would show them some work to do, saying they would remain and work until I had time to talk to them. This old fellow talked good Spanish. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 319 I showed them a piece of land that we desired to plant in corn. They went to work and cleared the brush from it. I afterwards gave this same land to these Indians. When Brother Merrills left, our ditch was not nearly finished. In fact it was simply commenced, and we who were left were almost destitute and heavily in debt. Some of the same Indians we had employed offered to take hold and help us finish up the ditch if we would let them have some land lying along the river bottom. The land was sandy and broken with hills and hollows, and there was considerable brush on it. It was a kind of land the whites did not desire but the very kind the Indians preferred. I agreed to let them have this privilege. The first who came were the same party under Malia (Maricopas), who worked clearing off land. I gave them the eastern portion of the land. Francisco Chico Ochoa, a Pima, came well recommended as a good, honest man. He agreed to keep me posted in regard to the character of those applying for lands. The Pimas were to have the western portion of the lands. The agreement was that no Indians would be allowed to remain on these lands except those who would observe good order, live honest, sober, etc., and work for their own living, and in no way molest the settlers. I talked with Mr. Hayden and some others about my plans. They said the Indians were generally well- disposed, and that years before the whites had invited quite a colony of Pimas to leave the Gila and come and settle on Salt river, as a kind of outpost or guard against the Apaches. This had been a success. "But," said Mr. Hayden, *'as the country builds up and these Indians are not needed, you will doubtless see some of these 320 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. same men who invited them here join in to drive them away. You, no doubt, will have trouble with your Indians in time." I was deeply interested in these natives, and felt determined to do all I could for them ; in fact, it was Indian or nothing if we finished our ditch in time to do anything the following season. So I divided off the land between the Pimas and Maricopas, leaving the chiefs to divide the lands among their people. They soon went to work enlarging the ditch. These natives were of the poorer class, having been liv- ing in settlements where the water had been shut off from them. They had been living for years in poverty and degradation. Their association with white men had only degraded them the more, and they were dwindling away and numbering less and less every year; so when they had the privilege of taking hold with us they were truly grateful. When they commenced to move, some thirty odd miles, my son Wiley took his team and hauled their stuff for them. The squaws appreciated this, as most every- thing would have been carried on their heads ; many a time they would pack from seventy-five to a hundred pounds. Some may ask, *Tf these Indians were so desti- tute, what was there to move?" I will see if I can think what there was. I remember well there was an eight- mule load for the Maricopas. Without giving the number and pounds, I will name some of the principal articles. There were earthen water jars and cooking utensils ; baskets and more bas- kets ; dogs — too poor to make it afoot ; Mosquite beans ; old rawhides, metats, primitive hand-mills; a few old shovels, hoes, axes, wooden plows, etc. These were about the average outfit of an Indian household. They FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 32 1 were about destitute of provisions. I went and made arrangements with Mr. Hayden for their bread stuff. The ditch was enlarged, during the fall and winter, so that there were several hundred acres of grain sowed by ourselves and Indians. I helped many of the Indians get their seed grain, and some of them borrowed from their more prosperous friends ; they also got cattle to plow their fields from the Indians on the Gila. As these people began to prosper, others came and wished to join in and continue to enlarge the ditch, and clear off and level down the broken lands. Sometimes the stock, belonging to the Indians living on their own lands on the opposite side of the river from our camp, would encroach on our fields. This was extremely annoying and many of the whites were sorely tried. I was continually working to get a right understand- ing established. The Indians claimed that no one had a right to occupy more country than they could fence or guard, and said that the people owning the fields were the ones to take care of them and watch the cattle. Some of the settlers accepted the situation, and when the Indian stock would get onto their grain fields they would shoot them down. This rather got away with the Indians yet they would not get mad but would take the carcasses for food. Owing to this trouble many of the white settlers became opposed to the Indians remaining longer on Salt river, so petitions were circulated and signed asking the government to remove them. The agent visited me one day while I was working on the ditch, with some forty Indians helping. He accosted me in a very uncivil tone and manner and wanted to know what I was doing with his Indians. I 32 2 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. said I was not aware that he owned these people. He said he was the U. S. agent from Sacaton; that he had heard that I was teaching these Indians Mormonism, and inducing them to leave the agency, and that he wanted the business stopped. I told him it was none of his business what I was doing with the Indians; asked him if he knew what Mor- monism was. He said he did not know anything about it. *' Then you had better wait until you do before com- manding me to quit teaching it. I teach them to quit stealing, gambling, getting drunk and practicing other and worse vices; and to be cleanly and industrious; and advised them to earn their own living; and get ready to educate their young people; to quit killing- witches; burn- ing their dead, etc. How does that suit you ? " ''O that is all right." "Well, sir, that is a part of Mormonism." He seemed a little ''stumped," then said, "Well, if I hear of any trouble, I shall forbid you employing these Indians." I here showed him a letter that I had received from him when we first came in, asking me to give employment to a party of Indians, saying that they were good men and willing to work, but had no means of support, and that anything I could do for them would be appreciated. I called his attention to what I had done for this people, according to his request, and asked him if he would like a copy of the letter sent to Washington. I never heard any more complaint from the agent. The Indians that I had taken in to help on the ditch had but little stock and had agreed to take care of it, which they generally did. But visitors would come to see them and would sometimes be careless. But the greatest trouble we had was with some five FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 323 hundred PImas who were settled about five miles from us, that we had no particular control over, they having settled there before our arrival. I, in common with others, was much annoyed by their cattle, but desiring peace I studied how to out- general these cattle. I had also studied very hard to get an insight into the Indian character and ways, and was on the watch for an opportunity. The old chief whom I had baptized had some twenty head of work cattle belonging to his family and particular friends. They had come onto my fields several times. The old man always said it was his boy's fault, and seemed to regret it, sometimes paying a few sacks of wheat for damages. I told him that paying damages was a bad thing. It was loss to him and no gain to me, that I wanted the cattle kept off Finally an idea struck me. The cattle had damaged my crops a number of times. One day when I found them in my field I sent them to the chief with word that if they got on my field three times more that they would be mine, and that I would put my brand on them. Soon the old man came over to see me, bringing a good interpreter. Said he : 'T do not understand what you say about branding my cattle." Here I took a memorandum book from my pocket and commenced figuring. I explained to him that the cattle had been on my field and damaged me to an amount almost as much as the cattle were worth, and that three times more damaging would pay for the cattle when I would have a right to put my brand on them, having paid their full value. I talked pleasantly and kindly, admitting that he was a good man and wanted to do right, but his boys were 324 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. bad and careless. I said I would loan them the cattle for a while as I did not need them, but would let him know when I wanted them. The old man was puzzled, he did not know what to say or do. At length, after sitting and studying a while, he said : "Suppose the cattle never get onto your land again; how will it be then ?" I then showed him my book and explained to him that some accounts were in pencil and some in pen and ink; that his was still in pencil and if left that way would wear out after a time, but sometimes it lasted two or three years, and that if he would keep his cattle away for a long time I would not write with ink and maybe the pencil marks would all wear out. He seemed pleased at this, saying that the cattle should not get back any more, and the account would be sure to wear out before they came back. I now gave the old man a piece of ground on our side near the crossing of the river. He said he would live there and watch the cattle himself and not let them cross. This was the land I had formerly given to my first interpreter who had deceived me so. This same fellow came afterwards and claimed the land. He was a Mari- copa. This was on the end of the land I had given to the Pimas. I explained this to him. Although I con- sidered there was nothing due to the man, I offered him land up among his own people. This he declined, but claimed the first piece. I told him I had paid him for the land . He said I had not paid him for the land but for the work done on it; that the land was his. I finally told him to leave and bother me no more; that he was dishonest and I did not want to see him till he was a better man. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 325 CHAPTER XLVIII. I am Accused of Conniving with the Indians to Steal — My Arrest — Investigation and Discharge — The Fate of Witches among the Natives — I Interfere to Prevent their Murder — Captain Norval's Threat — His Mistake. MORE white people were coming into the valley all the time to settle, and a deep prejudice against the Indians was soon developed. I was accused of being in collusion with them in running off the settlers' stock so as to get a reward for returning it. This charge was presented to the agent at the Gila agency and from him it was sent to the military com- mander at Camp McDowell. There had been many accusations against the Indians and myself before this, but nothing in a formal way. This time notice had to be taken, so Capt. Sum- merhays with a posse of soldiers came to my ranch. I had often been to the camp and had talked to the officers about my affairs with the Indians. There was, from the first, a disposition of honor manifested by the military toward my labors. The posse arrived about sundown. The captain came in, opened some papers and said his orders were to arrest me for being in with the Indians in stealing stock, and asked if I could prove myself clear. I told him I did not intend to try to prove my inno- cence, but would help him to prove my guilt if possible, for if guilty I wanted to find it out and quit it. This rather pleased the captain who laughingly said: "Well you are a prisoner, but I will trust you not to run away." 326 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. Next morning we went out to see what evidence could be found. We first visited the Indians and heard their story. They said that the whites who were coming into the country were careless about their stock and it often strayed off a long ways. Some of the owners had offered to pay them for hunting it up. When they brought the stock some paid them, while others who were bad men would abuse them and tell them they had driven . the stock away on purpose to receive a reward for finding it. They said Captain Jones always told them to be honest with everybody and had forbidden any Indians to come to his place unless they would do right. The Indians were very earnest in their talk, saying they had been friends to the people that had come in, and that it was bad to be accused so unjustly, and said they would not hunt any more stock. The captain told them that would be wrong as the people were poor and did not know the range. One Indian, Valensuela, spoke up and said: " Well, I will teach these people better. I will go and get their stock and give it to them, and I won't take a cent if they offer it to me." The spirit and manner of the Indians convinced the captain that they had been wrongfully accused. From the Indian camp we went to where the greater portion of my accusers were at work on a ditch. The captain called the attention of the crowd and made known his business by saying, ''Mr. Jones has been accused of causing the Indians to run off your stock. Do any of you know anything about the charge ? " No one answered against me. Some said they did not think I had done anything of the kind. We were now some three miles from my ranch. The captain FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 327 drove back to the road and offered to take me home, saying he had got through. I asked him what he was going to do with his prisoner. He offered to give me a letter to pubHsh clearing me from all the charges. I told him I had become so used to such things that I cared but little about them. He replied that it was a good thing for a man in my situation not to be too "thin skinned." Through this affair I got on record at the Post as reliable, and ever afterwards my word was taken in preference to any reports against me. I was kept tolerably busy watching and defending the rights of the Indians; also in trying to correct evils existing among the natives. One thing that taxed all my ability was to break up witchcraft, their main super- stition. Both Maricopas and Pimas fully believed that all sickness and calamities of any kind were caused by witches. Their witch doctors claim the power to divine who the witches are. When this is done all hands turn out with clubs and stones and kill the poor wretch pointed out. Whenever there is much sickness among them some one has to die as a witch. This I had endeavored to check by teaching them better, but I soon learned that my teaching had not reached the desire, as witches were killed among those settling with us of the Maricopas. I went to their camp and told old Malia, who was quite intelligent in many respects, that if such an act occurred again that I would deliver them to the law to be dealt with as murderers. At the same time explain- ing to his people the general laws of health, showing them that the violation of natural laws produced sickness. Some time after this a Maricopa woman came and 328 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. told my wife that the Maricopas had decided to kill me ; that the witches were killing their children and that I would not allow them to kill the witches. So the only way to protect the lives of their children would be to kill me, as I was a friend of the witches. When I came home my wife told me of this threat. She seemed a little concerned for my welfare, but her faith was always with mine ; so we decided that it would be best for me to go at once and put a stop to this feeling. I got on my horse and went alone some three miles to their camp. Most of the Indians were gathered together. As I approached none spoke ; all were sullen. This confirmed to me the truth of the squaw's report, as the Indians generally met me in a friendly manner. I went directly to the subject; told them what I had heard, saying to them that I had no fears of their killing me and that there was no use for them to entertain any such feeling towards me, for I was their friend and teach- ing them the truth, and that God would protect me. I again talked to them a long time and finally seemed to gain some influence. The Pimas had also been guilty of the same prac- tice. When I heard of this I took a good interpreter and went to their camp, which was across the river among the old settlers not of our colonizers. I had to labor long and hard before getting any sat- isfactory results. The old chief acknowledged that they had killed one witch and hed almost killed another, who had recovered, and that they were then doctoring him to cure him, so that all hands could turn out and "kill him better." I asked how they knew these men were witches. The answer was that the ''doctor" had pointed them out. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 329 I asked to see this ''doctor." This was declined. I insisted, telling the chief that I would neither befriend him nor his people, nor talk to them about anything more until this ''doctor" was shown me. This the old fellow did not like ; for I had done them much good already, and was continually watching and protecting their interests. They all knew this and apprciated the same. Numbers of the old men gathered around, chatting together. I continued to repeat my request to see the "doctor." Finally, he was brought out. I managed, after talking a long time, to really convince these Indians that it was wrong to believe in witches or, at least, to kill them. They agreed to quit the practice and I had rea- son to believe that they were partially converted, at least, for the poor fellow, who had been almost killed, came to my ranch a few weeks after this. He was terribly banged up ; but, as soon as he could possibly travel, he came to let me know that I had saved him ; that his peo- ple had agreed not to kill him, and that he would always call himself my boy, as I had saved his life. Many persons were jealous of my influence with the natives and wondered how I managed to obtain so much power over them. I simply acted as a friend, and the Indians knew this. One circumstance I will relate that will explain a little of this power. There was one of our white set- tlers who had lost his only cow. She was running on the river bottom, near the Indian camp. At the time this occurred the commander at McDowell was Captain Norval, a rather impetuous officer. A letter was sent to this officer, stating that the Indians had stolen and killed the only cow that a poor man had and calling on him to come and redress the 330 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. wrong. Accordingly, Captain Norval soon appeared, at the head of some dragoons, went to Mesa City and wrote an order, to be deHvered to the Indians through me, that the cow had to be produced or paid for within six hours, or he would kill the last Indian to be found. The Indians accused lived across the river, which was now very high. I immediately sent a courier for the old chief to come to my ranch, also informing him of the charge. The old man came as soon as possible, having to swim the river. He was quite old and feeble, but man- aged to get over with the help of some younger men. Captain Norval soon made his appearance and, with something of a flourish, reiterated his threat. The old chief looked at him in a dazed manner, then asked if the captain wanted them to pay for the cow when they knew nothing about her. "No; but you have stolen the cow and killed and eaten her, and you have got to pay for her or I will turn my soldiers loose on you." "Who says we killed this man's cow?" "This letter says so." "That letter lies; we know nothing about the cow. It would be better for us if we had killed her, for we could then confess and pay for her; but how can we confess and pay for what we know nothing about?" The captain then asked what had become of the cow. The old chief said he did not know, positively, but thought perhaps he could tell. He said the day the cow was lost there had been a sudden rise in the river; the water coming down so suddenly that the cow, being on an island, was probably washed way and drowned. The old man was so simple and straightforward in all his talk that Captain Norval became convinced that he was truth- FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 33 1 ful, and that the charge was more malicious than rea- sonable. There was scarcely a week passed but what there were miserable, petty charges brought against the Indians, often on the slightest grounds, that had to be met. CHAPTER XLIX. Opposition to the Indians — An Exciting Meeting — A Commission Appointed to Investigate Indian Water Claims — Efforts to Rob the Natives — Armed men Begin to Gather — Peaceful Settlement. SOON after the events just narrated occurred, Major Chaffee took command at Camp McDowell. He soon "took in" the situation and took an interest in the welfare and rights of the Indians. To him, more than any one else, is owing the preservation of the Indian's rights and the final allowing of the lands to these people. I will give one more especial account and then go on. I could write a book on the doings of Salt river labors, but have not room in this for more than a few items. Once the spirit ran so high against the Indians, that it was determined to drive them away unless they came to such terms as the whites should dictate. A mass meeting was called to meet at Tempe, for both whites and natives. At the time it was hardly safe for me to appear, as my life had been threatened. I had even been told to my face by a Captain Sharp, that he. was ready to help put the rope around my neck any day. However, I went to the meeting. Many demands 332 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. were made of the Indians, all of which they acceded to that was possible for them to do. The whites were about satisfied with the disposition of the Indians, when one man got up and said he had a saddle stolen from him some two years previous, and that he would not con- sent for the Indians to remain longer where they were, unless they paid for the saddle. At this, several others commenced telling what they had lost and demanded the same. I had kept perfectly silent during the whole parley. Now when this was explained to the Indians, they seemed at a loss what to say. Finally the chief said they were not able to pay for these things ; that it was asking more than they could do. The spirit of the whites was really devilish ; they seemed determined to drive the Indians to the w^ll, not one had spoken a word in their behalf. I now felt iiTipelled to speak. When I asked to be heard there were many hard looks given me. The chair- man gave consent. As soon as I commenced some one interrupted me. I sat down. The chairman called for order. I then said, 'Tf you gentlemen will hear me through without interruption, allowing me free speech, I will talk. When I get through my life is in your hands, do with me as you please, but I will not talk unless you agree to let me say just what I please." They took a vote to hear me through. My defense of the Indians was to the point. I told the whites that they demanded of the natives, what none of them could do ; that if they were required to make all their wrongs right that they had committed for the last two years, it would bankrupt them morally and financially. There were other thieves in the country beside Indian thieves, that may have stolen the articles. I referred to the virtue and honesty of the Pimas when FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 333 the whites first came among them, showing that all their vile degradation and dishonesty was copied from the white man. Also, that many now present were corrupt and immoral, much more so than the average Indian. Congressman Stephens was present. I never heard what he thought of my speech, but I conquered the most present, and they agreed to let the Indians have another trial. All of these men finally became nfiy friends. This meeting, just described, was with the Indians, the old settlers on the north side of the river. Those settling on the Utah ditch were not called in question at this time by the persons seeking to drive the others away. To make it more easy for the reader to understand, I will speak of the Indians as north side and south side. The north side being those who were settled there by invitation of the whites before our colony settled on Salt river. All the control or influence I had over them was simply as their friend. The south side settlers were those who had colonized on lands watered by the Utah ditch. They were commonly known as "Jones' Indians." The enemies that the latter had to meet, were many of the settlers, their immediate neighbors. Many and various attempts were made to have them driven back to the agency. Parties who bought shares in the Utah ditch as well as some of the original owners, disputed the right of the Indians to water, although they had done a large portion of the original work, and were always the most ready workers in making repairs. These efforts to rob the Indians of their just rights, had a tendency to discourage the poor people from mak- ing improvements that they otherwise would have done. The question of the Indians' rights to water, finally became so hardly contested, that I applied to Major 334 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. Chaffee, to cause an investigation to be made and protect the Indians in their rights. I had kept sufficient account of their work to show conclusively that they were entitled to water. A commissioner was sent to make some preliminary enquiries. Most of the share holders claimed that the Indians had no legal right in the ditch, which was a fact, technically speaking, as no transfers had been made to them, simply verbally promised that by doing their share of work from year to year, that they could have water. Every season some one would try to break this arrangement, and I determined to put a stop to it. A meeting of the share holders was called, to take testi- mony to send to this commissioner for the decision to be based upon. At this meeting I was threatened with the penitentiary if I established a claim for the Indians. The party who made the threat, said he thought he had bought unencumbered shares in the ditch from me ; others claimed the same. Now the facts were, that each and every one who bought shares in the Utah ditch or lands from me, agreed to honor and assist in every way to help carry out the work of helping the Indians. Some betrayed their trust in a most dishonorable and unreasonable way. My answer was that the Indians should be pro- tected, prison or no prison. It was finally agreed by all the shareholders that, if I would cease to press the mat- ter farther and sign the paper with the rest, reporting that the Indians had no legal right, all hands would agree to set apart a certain portion of water, measured through a head-gate, and sign an agreement, allowing the Indians perpetual use of that share on certain conditions. After these conditions were agreed upon and a com- mittee appointed, that I had confidence in, to see to the FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 335 dividing of the water, I signed the report with the rest. This I thought best to do at the time, reserving the right, however, that if the whites ever broke faith with the Indians I would seek to protect them at all hazards. This contract has been measurably kept with more or less grumbling from some of the shareholders. The lands the Indians occupied I had secured to them the best I could by having my sons claim some of it in their names. One quarter-section was secured by purchase from a Mexican, who settled on a forty, allowing the Indians the balance. I bought the Mexican out and sold the forty to a supposed friend, with the understanding that he was to use the forty and let the Indians have the balance, as formerly agreed upon. This agreement was broken. The party told the Indians that I had sold the whole quarter-section to him and agreed to drive them off The poor Indians believed him and gave up the land, when the good friend (?) sold the whole to a third party, who knew nothing of the facts. The Indians felt very badly towards me about this. I knew nothing of the transaction until too late to remedy the wrong. This same man gave testimony against me afterwards, stating that I had sold the whole quarter-section, and I had to pay the Indians for dispos- sessing them. It now became the popular idea to try to jump the Indians lands. The Indians on the north side were threatened with land jumpers from Phoenix and Tempe. One party moved on their lands taking tools, sur- veying outfit, provisions, etc., and went to work just as though no Indians' were around. There were quite a number of them. They had sent their teams back home. The 336 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. Indians gathered around them, and In a good-natured manner loaded all their stuff into their wagons, then by main force of numbers picked up the whites, loaded them on top of the loading, then seized the wagons by hand and hauled the whole outfit off from their lands laughing and joking all the time. The whites dared not make any resistance. This raised a big excitement, and armed companies commenced to gather both at Tempe and Phoenix. It looked now as though blood would be shed. I went to McDowell and reported to Major Chaffee, he said he would be ready at five minutes' notice to come to the protection of the Indians; for me to go back and keep watch of the moves aud let him know the minute any violence was offered. This whole business was broken up by the cunning of an Indian who lived at Tempe. The Tempe company was headed by a captain who said the Indians had broken into his house and robbed him. He had raised a great excitement and quite a com- pany, and was getting ready to join the company from Phoenix to make war on the Indians who had ran them off from their lands. This Tempe Indian was standing looking at Captain J 's company, when someone asked him if the Indians had really broken into Captain J 's house. Juan said: ''Yes." "What made them do it?" Juan said "the captain owed an Indian for his squaw and would not pay him, and the Indian had got into the captain's house and stole his breeches to pay himself" At this the company turned on their captain, gave him a good cursing, broke ranks and went about their business. This soon reached the Phoenix company, who FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 2>2>7 became disgusted and broke, whether Juan told the truth or not it answered the purpose, and had a lasting effect, for most every one believed him. CHAPTER L. I decide to Devote Myself to Personal Interests — Summoned as a Witness in Indian Difficulties — My own Troubles — I meet the Demands of my Brethren though it Takes my Home. MAJOR CHAFFEE had been watching the efforts of the whites to rob the natives of their rights. He had reported to the proper department the condition of affairs. He did all he could to protect the rights of the Indians. I kept him continually posted and I am satisfied that without his oversight of affairs the Indians would have been driven away and the work among them on Salt river broken up. One piece of land that the whites had attempted to take from the Indians known as "Gironimo's farm," on a school section, had passed from one claimant to another, each one threatening that they would hold it. One party went to work on this land. I warned him off and got a good cursing, a few days after this he in an exulting manner said to me "I have now sold this land to ,and got my pay. I would like to see you face him, I guess you dare not do it. He intends to put his teams to plowing and I guess you will have to give up this time." As soon as the teams started to plow I notified the young men to stop and to tell their father that he could 338 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. not occupy the land. This, considering who the individ- ual was, was considered not worth noticing and the plow- ing continued. I went to camp and reported to Captain Chaffee. He sent a note saying they must get off or he would send a file of soldiers to put them off. They went off considerably. Captain Chaffee had recommended the setting apart the lands occupied by the Indians as reservations, after much labor and investigation, this was finally done. President Hayes declared the whole of Salt River valley Indian reservation, including Phoenix, Tempe, Mesa City and the whole country occupied by the whites. When this proclamation came out there was a rattling among the ''dry bones." All were astounded, the ''flop" was so sudden, and complete. From daily expecting orders to come to send the Indians away, the towns, fine ranches and all were given to the Indians. Many were puzzled over this proclamation, not knowing but what it was intended in earnest, but the majority knew it was a mistake as we had only asked for the lands occupied by the Indians. There was now a complete revulsion of feeling toward me by the old settlers. They acknowledged I had won. I was looked upon as a person who would never give up. All knew I had made the fight alone during the whole time. I was assisted by my family only and it stands on the record in the books of the settlement that my labors were not sustained by my associates. So for this reason I claim the right to speak singly. I would rather it had been different for I knew good works had been done by others but as they have placed their names on record as never having sustained me I will have to let them take their choice. As "bungling" as I may have been I got the Indians their lands. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 339 It was nearly a year before things were straightened up and put to rights. Finally President Hayes modified the grant giving the Indians only the lands they occupied. During the whole of this time the Indians were steadily improving their farms, helping to enlarge the ditch, and generally advancing in good behavior ; and with a few exceptions becoming moral and industrious ; raising good crops, selling large quantities of wheat and sustaining themselves without help from anyone. Once our place was visited by an Indian inspector who reported the Indians in a better condition than any on the government reservations. Many had been baptized. I had by this time become quite unpopular among those who, I thought, ought to be my friends. I had gotten into the habit of resisting every one who opposed my labors with the natives. Such seemed like an enemy. When I saw the Indians firmly established on their lands I desired to sell out and go on to Mexico. Persons were appointed from time to time to take my place with the Pimas. But little progress was made until my eldest son, Daniel P. was placed in charge of them. A school house was built, and some few now took an interest in helping along the work. Sisters Susanna Brady, Susan Savage and a Sister Harmon, formerly of the Sixteenth Ward, Salt Lake City, commenced teaching the children who made rapid progress. Many of them at this time can read in the third and fourth readers, calculate figures and write a very good hand. Sister Harmon has taught them music. Many of the young people are good singers, one having learned to play the organ. Many of the older natives are intelligent and often speak in meeting with much force and understanding. 340 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. An effort was made by a company to buy me out but not being able to agree among themselves it failed. My farm was quite valuable. From the products of it I had paid most of the old debts. I now concluded to make Salt River my home, improve my place and live in peace, as I had done all I could for the Indians. I gave up all pretence of having any control or management of any kind whatever over their affairs, farther than to be friendly and give them such advice as a friend could. I supposed this would be satisfactory and end all trouble, but in this I was mistaken. One day while at work plowing on a ranch some four miles from home, one of my sons brought me a note stating that the Indians had made complaint against some of the settlers and that the charge was being investigated and that I was wanted as a witness. I had heard of no trouble lately and could not call to mind anything wherein the Indians had a right to com- plain. My supposition was that it was some difficulty that had taken place in my absence as I had been away from home several days. I wrote a note to the Bishop who was to conduct the investigation saying that I had no knowledge of any unsettled difficulties between the Indians and whites, and that I was not at present paying any attention to Indian affairs and could not possibly call to mind anything that would make my evidence needed, but if there was, to please send me word by my son and I would come immediately. I went on with my plowing thinking noth- ing more about the matter. Soon my son Wesley came at full gallop, looking quite excited. I asked him what was the matter, he FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 34 1 replied, "They are going- to cut you off from the Church, I heard them say so." I asked, **Did they send you to tell me?" "No, but I heard what they said and came as fast as I could to tell you; but I don't know what they mean." I jumped on the horse and got to the place as soon as possible where the trial was going on, but they had adjourned. I wrote a note to the Bishop immediately, stating that I wished to make satisfaction if I had offend- ed, as I had not intended to. In answer I received the following : "JoNESViLLE, April 1st, 1883. ''Elder D. W. Jones: "Understanding that you desire to appear in the Bishop's Court and apologize for your disregard to our notice sent you to attend and give testimony, we will be in session tomorrow, at 4 p. m., at the school-house, at which time you can avail yourself of the opportunity. "Bishop." Before the time of meeting, next day, I learned, to my surprise, that the whole business was against myself; that I was being tried for robbing Indians of their lands. This, to me, was so unjust, so unreasonable and in every way malicious that I made up my mind that I would make no defence whatever, but let the prosecutors go on and submit to whatever decision they gave. My reasons for this were that I knew there was a deep prejudice against me — not entirely without cause — and the only way for me to break it up would be to sub- mit to the parties who were trying to drive me to the wall. Next day I appeared and asked forgiveness for not 342 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. coming at the first notice. A motion was made to for- give me. Before this was put to vote I asked to make a statement so that my feelings would be fully understood, that was, that I should not have testified if I had been at the former hearing ; that I was now here according to their notice, but that I declined to make any defence whatever. The tribunal seemed puzzled to know what to do with me, but finally decided that I must make some more confessions. ' This I agreed to do at a public meeting. When the time came I made my apology, which was all right for the time and place, but a still greater humilia- tion was wanted. This I also agreed to. During these exercises my robbery case was being taken under advise- ment. However, I guess it will be as well to get through the confession while about it. Now, I do not wish any one to think that my apologies were not sincere, I fully realized that I had been disrespectful, for I really had no respect for the whole proceedings. The last decision was that I was to apologize before the whole ward and make full and complete satisfaction to all present. At the appointed time I stood up and did the best I could, but was told that it was not satisfactory. I then asked that a paper be prepared, just what would satisfy, and I would endorse it. This was agreed to, and under instructions the clerk commenced to write. I was standing, but was asked to take a seat. I declined, as I had the floor and was determined to keep it until the business was finished. Finally, after many failures, a satisfactory confession was written out and read. I signed the same with my own free will and consent. There was nothing in the requirement but what was reasonable under the circum- stances. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 343 I find by the date of the decision against me, that it was given before the last confession, as that could not possibly have taken place within three days from the ap- peal. This is a copy of the decision given : "April 3rd, 1883. ''Brother D. W. Jones: ''It is the decision of the Bishop's court that you pay the receivers * * the sum of three hundred dollars for dispossessing Indians of their lands ; said sum to be paid on or before the 14th of April, 1883, and if not paid by that time you shall be cut off from the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints." I made up my mind to abide the decision without appealing it. A short time before this trouble Brother Snow had visited Salt River and had, so I understood, caused to be settled some feelings that had existed for some time past between myself and others. I had in good faith agreed to work in unison with the authorities of the stake and had been doing my best to prove my sincerity. When this decision was given I went to the Presi- dent of the Stake and showed it to him. He expressed himself surprised, saying that he had always thought me over-tenacious about the Indians' rights. He said I could appeal it. I told him it would take time and trouble, and I felt like paying the fine and letting the matter rest, but that I feared there was a disposition to crowd me. The time was so short — only ten days allowed — and that money was scarce and hard to get. He replied that all that could be expected was for me to consent and pay as soon as I could. I told him I feared not, as the whole proceeding showed malice. I went back home and wrote the Bishop a letter, 344 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. saying that I would abide the decision and that he could take charge of a lot of wagons and stock which myself and sons owned that were now at home on the ranch. I gave a list of the same, and they were worth over one thousand dollars. I told him he could take charge of the whole of it or that he could pick and receive sufficient to cover the fine, and I would hold myself in readiness to assist under his counsel to get the money out of the property. If my offer was not properly worded I would sign any agreement that might be required of me ; but when the letter was read one party remarked, "Jones has followed his rule and gone contrary to what we expected.'* CHAPTER LI. I Remove to Tonto Basin — Death by Accident of my Wife and Child— Return to Salt River— My Official Duties There— Trip to Old Mexico. MY OFFER was unfavorably received, and I was told to have the cash ready to pay by the time named. I counseled with those who presided over me, and though the advice I received was contrary to my ideas of justice and right, I followed it, though it was at the complete sacrifice of my home acquired by years of toil and hardship. I was determined to retain my standing in the Church at any cost, and leave judg- ment with the Lord, who will eventually deal out strict justice to all men. I was so much used up now that I felt like hiding up FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 345 for the balance of my days. I settled up my affairs in Salt River and moved to Tonto Basin, where but few people could live, the place being small. I commenced to make me a farm and fix for a quiet life. My family were kind and good to me. My wife was one of the noblest and best women that ever lived, and was so acknowledged by all who knew her. On settling in Tonto my nature was to improve. I soon got started an extension of the public ditch and a road to the lumber region. My wife assisted in organ- izing a Relief Society, and everything seemed prosperous for future peace and happiness, but my misfortunes were only commenced. During the winter it rained almost incessantly. We were living in a large tent with a shed in front. One day, during a storm, this shed fell, killing my wife and babe two years old. She was the mother of fourteen children, but seemed just in the prime of life and vigor. All I will say is, that for over a year I would have been glad to have died. 1 could not remain in the place after this, so I went back to Salt River, settled in Tempe, built a nice little house and furnished it up completely. Brother B. F. Johnson, a neighbor, asked me one day why I was so particular to finish my house so thoroughly. I replied, ''We are promised many fold for all we sacrifice for the gospel's sake. I have given up several half-finished houses for the gospel's sake, and if I have to take them all back multiplied I want one decent place to live in while I finish them up." Speaking of Brother Johnson reminds me of a cir- cumstance that he will remember: One day he and I were together, when Brother Mil- ton Rey, who had been some time laboring among the Indians at Jonesville, came riding up to us in a hurried, 346 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. excited manner, he said that he had just learned some- thing greatly to my advantage ; that he had been talking to the Indians and they had told him that I had never wronged them in any way and that it was all a mistake. He wanted me to go immediately with him and get a re-hearing on all charges brought against me. I was really amused at his earnestness, as was also Brother Johnson. Brother Rey could not understand why I did not take more interest in what he was telling me, until I explained to him that I was well aware that through prejudice and not through guilt had I been con- demned. There were a few unworthy Indians whom I had to correct from time to time, they might have said some- thing against me when prompted to do so, but the Indians as a body always honored me more than any one else, and do so to this day. After getting my house finished in Tempe and moving my children from Tonto, I concluded to go ahead and do the best I could to make myself useful. The school district, one of the oldest and richest in the country, had one of the poorest school houses, owing to the former trustees not being able to understand the laws alike. As there were now many Mormons living in the dis- trict it was proposed that they should have a repre- sentative; I was chosen for this place. The other two agreed to sustain me in building a good school house. We soon made arrangements, and one of the best houses in the county was speedily erected and ready for use. I was also appointed to take the school census of the district, and to be assistant assessor for the Mesa and Jonesville districts. These active services helped me somewhat to bear the grief for the loss of my wife. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. - 547 During the summer of 1884 my mind often rested on Mexico, and the obligation I felt resting upon me not to give up my mission in that country. I tried to rid my mind of these reflections but could not. I remembered that I had agreed with Brother Brig- ham and George A. Smith to stick to the mission so long as I lived; I remembered that Brother Smith talked to me about this mission, even after we had to shake him every few minutes to keep him awake, so that he would breathe by force of will. I was with him daily just before his death. Once he said to me that he would like to live to help in the Mexican mission. Brother Brigham's letter directing me to go on to one of the spots where Israel would sooner or later gather, etc., would come to my mind. Again, I remem- bered that Brother Brigham had told me that during my mission there would be times when I would seemingly be surrounded with a high, strong stone wall, and in which there would appear no opening. "But," said he, ''don't kick at it for you will only make your toes sore. Be faithful and in time it will be removed." It now occurred to me that I had forgotten the counsel not to kick, for I had been kicking at this very wall, and had got my toes terribly broken. I made up my mind to try and quit. Finally the spirit and desire became so strong to visit Mexico that I could not resist the feeling. My children needed what we had left for their support, so I made up my mind that I would go if I had to make the trip on foot. At this time the land committee was work- ing in Mexico. I often met some of them, but all seemed to avoid receiving any information from me. This was not at all strange for I knew that I was looked upon as rebellious, as my side of the story had never been heard. 348 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. About the time that I was thinking of starting, there was an old miner from Utah came to my house with a good traveling outfit, and wished to go to Mexico. He offered to take me through if I would furnish a certain amount of horse feed and provisions and assist him as interpreter in getting through the custom house, and get him introduced to some of the mine owners in Mexico. I had heard some little about this man and had met him many years past in Utah. He made me such fair offers that I concluded to go along with him. As the most that I cared for was to get to Mexico with my sad- dler's tools. With them I knew I would be safe for expenses at any rate. My main desire was to get to the district of country and see what shape the spot was in that Brother Brigham had approved. While in Provo one time Brother Brigham., in pres- ence of Brother Cannon and others, took a map and motioning his finger around over the map settled onto this very place and said, "Here is a gathering place for the Saints." I knew the place but had never pointed it out to Brother Brigham. I had never been on the land but had been within a few miles of it and had heard a full des- cription of the place. Knowing the desire was to get land in Mexico I naturally supposed that now was the time to get this place secured provided it was for sale. So I determined to go and find out and at the same time put myself in the way of giving such information as I had formerly obtained while in Mexico. I had heard that the committee were trying to get lands from the government or land companies which amounted to the same. This I fully believed would fail having faith in the report given us while on our mission to Mexico by the old governor and accepted by Presi- FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 349 dent Young. Also knowing that the re-surveying of the country would make but slight difference in the con- ditions, having all this before me I hoped to go down and be of some use. The trip through was made without any accident occurring worth mentioning. My companion seemed wholy absorbed in mining speculations, something I had never taken any interest in nor wished to. When we arrived at Ascencion, I found quite a number of our people camped there. Some of them had been on the ground for some time, waiting for the land purchase ta be made. While here, the miner with, whom I was traveling, and who agreed to take me on to Guerero, some two hundred and fifty miles farther, heard of some new mines, purporting to be very rich, that had lately been discovered. They were not far out of our way, and he wished to go by and see them and agreed, if he wished to stay there, to let me have the team to go on and not detain me over three days. We went to the place — Sa- binal. Quite an excitement was up, rich prospects being found daily. We made camp and I commenced to get dinner. My companion went prospecting and soon returned with some small pieces of rock and a big grin, saying that he had "struck it rich." He could scarcely spend time to eat his dinner ; he wanted me to go and see his find. I told him that I neither knew nor cared anything about mines, but that I would take care of camp and the team^ and he could go and finish his prospecting. We were about six miles from water and desired to go there for camp. Soon Mr. S. returned with more rock ; he was an old prospector and really understood his business. He said he had found a regular lead,. 350 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. where it was exposed in a ravine, and that it showed very rich. I had been told what the laws were In regard to recording discoveries. They are different from the United States laws ; no monument or notice is of any use. As soon as a discovery is made the finder must go and put the same on record. The one first recording holds the claim, having four months to do a certain amount of work required. I explained this to the miner and also told him that any one getting to the recorder ahead of him could take his discovery. We were with traveling carriage and seventy-five miles from the recorder s office — at Casas Grandes. There was a horseback trail much nearer and prospectors out in every direction, and liable to run into this vein. Mr. S. became excited and we started for Casas Grandes in a hurry ; no time was lost. On arriving there I helped to get all the necessary papers made out, and found a person to see that all was straight. When the papers were all filed and settled Mr. S. showed me my name as half owner in the find, and said, "You are now a rich man; if you will stick to me a few days you will soon be able to go on and buy your land," provided the rock assayed as much as he be- lieved it would — some three hundred dollars. To find this out it would become necessary to go to El Paso, some two hundred miles, for an assay. Again I was persuaded, as I had not yet got to the district I desired to reach, Mr. S. reiterating his offer that, as soon as he could get settled to mining, I could have the use of his team as long as I wished to go on my land busi- ness. So we went back to the discovery, which was on our road to El Paso, and procured some three hundred pounds of ore from the vein. I helped to get the rock ; FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 35 1 the vein showed well. When we arrived in El Paso and got the assay it showed over six hundred dollars, wh ,h was very rich. We had no trouble in getting all the help we needed to work the mine. It was not long before my partner showed his real character. As soon as the means were secured to work the mine and he needed me no further he showed a mur- derous spirit. I now made up my mind to stay with him the four months and get my rights on record, for it was through my individual influence that the means were ob- tained to work the mine. I had to watch my life contin- ually during the four months, not daring to eat or sleep with my partner. I will not weary the reader with what occurred at this camp. It would be rather unpleasant to read, but it is no exaggeration as many who were there from time to time can testify to say that my life was in danger most of the time while in this camp. When I got my rights on record I left the camp, appointed a representative to look after my interests according to the laws of Mexico. The mine was quite rich turning out much rich ore and making a large dump of ore that would have paid to freight. My partner spent most all the proceeds in high living and spreeing. I left the mine in disgust and have never made an enquiry about it since, I have passed in sight of the district twice since while on land business and never cared to make an enquiry concerning either the mine or partner. 352 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. CHAPTER LII. Accidental Shooting of my Son-in-law — My Opinion of Early Colo- nization by the Saints — I go on an Exploring Trip — I Find the Land Described by President Young — I Endeavor to Make a Pur- chase but Fail. WHILE doing the assessment work one of my sons and a son-in-law came from Salt River to help me. My son-in-law, John Brady, shot himself accidentally by dropping a pistol. He died of the wound and was buried near the camp of Saints at Ascencion. Brother Jesse Steele was at the camp at the time and helped to nurse him. He lived eight days after being wounded. Death was caused by the bursting of an artery that had been slightly wounded. This occurred in the night time. We were watching as usual but no suspicion of the bleeding existed until he was too far gone to recruit when the bleeding was stopped. This was hard on me as I felt toward him as a real son he having always shown me much kindness. During these four months I often visited the camp of the Saints at Ascension. The first time I met one of the brethren of the com- mittee he asked me what I thought of their proposed land purchase. I said that I believed that it would be a failure. When I was asked why, I related all about our first investigations and our report to Brother Brigham, saying that I believed we reported the truth, and that if the present efforts succeeded it would prove our reports false. This was looked on more as an insult than as information. I was told that conditions had changed since the FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 353 time of our visit to Mexico; that our reports might have been all right at the time, but would not apply to the present. My answer to this was that I recognized the face of the country as being just the same as formerly; that mountains and valleys were all in place; that I saw no signs of earthquakes having changed the conditions, therefore I could not see why our reports if true then were not true now. I soon learned that any information that I might offer would simply be looked on as worth- less. I was told that Mr. Campos, who was the agent now offering them lands, was one like Hiram of old raised up for the salvation of the people. I answered that he was a fraud raised up to swindle them out of their money. I was severely rebuked for this remark, and told that Mr. Campos had been introduced and vouched for in a letter of introduction, as the man who opened the first door to the Elders in Mexico, in the City of Chihuahua, and that anything I might think or say would avail nothing. This was at first a surprise to me, for I was in charge of Chihuahua at the time and never heard of Mr. Campos, but I learned afterwards that he was a police officer at the time and possibly was on duty the evening we held meeting in the public Cock Pit. As soon as I was thoroughly convinced that I could do no good here I made up my mind to continue on my first effort to get to the country I had started for. During the winter and spring of 1885, while attend- ing to the mining business, I made several trips to El Paso. Once, while in El Paso, I met Brothers Erastus Snow and Samuel H. Hill who were on their way to the city of Mexico on business of importance. They not wishing to be delayed accepted my assistance in getting their luggage checked, their money changed and other 354 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. services that helped them along, as I was acquainted with the officers and business. This occurred February 19th, 1885. At that time I explained to Brother Snow my desire regarding this land. He said for me to go ahead, hop- ing I would succeed. I knew that it would take con- siderable money to visit and thoroughly explore the country I desired to visit. The products of the mine although rich, as before stated, were wasted and probably would continue to be as I could not control my partner without going into law, and this would be ruinous under the laws of Mexico. I happened to meet a gentleman who had money and was desirous of going on the same business, he agreeing to bear the expenses for my services as inter- preter, etc. And that any lands found that might be wanted by the Mormons was to be entirely under my control. I now went home to Salt river to visit my children and prepare for the trip to Mexico. We went direct to the city of Chihuahua. Soon we were visited by different land speculators offering lands. We visited and examined various ranches, some as far down as the southern part of the state. We found some excellent properties at reasonable prices, but paid no attention to the worthless lands; simply examining titled properties of good reputation. We were in the city of Chihuahua, after having done considerable exploring, when we were approached by a man who described a piece of property that he had bonded, I soon became convinced that from the descrip- tion and locality that it was the land I desired to find. When we were alone 1 informed my friend of this and we agreed to go and see the place. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 355 We visited the parties holding the lands and agreed to go with them, it being some two hundred and fifty miles from Chihuahua, and in the district approved of by President Young for a gathering place. On arriving at this spot I felt sure that I had now found the place wanted. Without further description I will say that it is the most beautiful valley that I ever saw; fertile soil, water plentiful, and timber more than would ever be used; the whole face of the country covered with the best of grass. Climate mild; crops are raised in the vicinity without irrigation. The land held by the parties was for sixty days only. The question now was for me to try and get this secured before the bond ran out as there were others wanting to buy this piece in connection with a large tract adjoining it from another party. The owner of this piece I wanted was a friend to the owner of the large tract and had agreed that in case the present bond ran out that he should have the property to join onto his larger tract. The owner of the large tract had already entered into negotiations with a third party to sell the whole provided he got the small property. I had not as yet learned all these particulars, but I had learned enough to convince me that if the property was not secured within the sixty days that the price would be raised at least. From what I had learned I expected that Brother Snow would be at the new Colony station at Piedras Verdes, as the purchase had been made from Mr. Campos, and the people were now mov- ing on lands they supposed belonged to the purchase, but afterwards proved to be a portion of an old and well- known ranch known as Sandiago. The question was how to get to Brother Snow's 356 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. place the quickest way. It was at least two hundred miles distant across a country not much traveled, and some of the way considered dangerous because of Apaches. The fear that the Mexicans entertain for the Apaches puts me in mind of something that I saw when I was a small boy. Some rude boys had tied a tin can to a dog's tail and he ran by yelping, soon the can came off. I could see the dog running with all his might for a long ways. I wondered what made him keep running when nothing now was to his tail. I was too small at the time to understand that he was still scared at his first experience. The Mexicans are somewhat the same; to this day they are slow to forget past experiences, and seem to think the Apaches are still after them even in the localities where none have been seen for years. After thoroughly examining the land we went to the county seat and my friend procured a bond for the sixty days. We then started back east toward the city of Chihuahua. My desired route lay north and would turn off at Temosechic, about twenty miles from where we were. On arriving at Temosechic about noon I got out of our traveling carriage with my blankets and saddle bags, and without having made any arrangements whatever for the trip bade good-bye to my traveling companion. This was the same place where we had been so well treated ten years before while on our mission. I had perfect faith in the goodness of the people. For I wished to take the same route that we had come out on before and remembered many friends formerly met, and I believed they would remember me. I went directly to the house of Tomas Triboso, in FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 357 whose house we had held meeting. I had his autograph in my old memorandum book. On showing him this he grasped my hand and called his wife saying: "Here is our old friend the Mormon who preached in our house ten years ago." The old lady came in smiling, shook hands and embraced me, saying that all the women in town remem- bered my preaching. A good dinner was ordered at once. Don Tomas asked how he could serve me. I ex- plained my desire to reach the Mormon settlements as quick as possible, giving him my reasons. He replied : "All right; I have two good saddle horses. I would like to have you stay and visit us ; all the people would be delighted to see and hear you talk. We often speak about your people and are glad to hear that they are coming into Mexico. We hope that they will get here into our district in time." After dinner my kind host saddled up and took me to Providencia; there introduced me to the manager, who next morning sent me to Namaquipe, where I met the family of the good old patriarch, Francisco Vasques, formerly spoken of. In this way I was forwarded from place to place with dispatch, making through in good time with little expense. I met Brother Snow at Coralitos, and showed him the following letter : ''Messrs. Snow, Burton, Preston and others: "Dear Sirs: — At the request of Mr. Jones I write this letter. I have bonded the ranch, W , for the period of sixty days, for $30,000 in good and lawful money of the United States. I have agreed with Mr. Jones to sell the same to his people if he can take up 358 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. the bond within the time I have given him. Mr. Jones and I have been travehng together, looking at lands — Mr. Jones in the interest of his people and I for myself, looking for grazing. Mr. Jones has been of great bene- fit to me as an interpreter, and is well posted in Mexican lands, and I do this in appreciation of his friendship and services. This land is mostly farming, with plenty of good timber. After the payment of $15,000 the property can be delivered to purchasers. This property cannot be held long without much expense, which I cannot con- veniently do at present ; besides, delays are dangerous. I have given Mr. Jones my price on the land, which con- tains 31,000 acres, all told. "This is good country, which Mr. Jones is thorough- ly competent to detail to you. "Hoping to hear from some of you gentlemen soon, I am "Very respectfully yours, "F. G. South. "Temosachic, Mexico, "May 25th, 1886." This was written on the back of the letter: "I have considered the foregoing and can say that, while I regard the tract favorably located along the Sierra Madre, some eighty to one hundred miles south of Cor- ralis Basin, and, according to Mr. Jones' representation, is a desirable place, I am not in any condition, at present, to entertain the proposition ; but hope in the future to see our people stretching out in that direction. "E. Snow." Brother Snow said, in substance, that the money that had been appropriated, for the purchase of lands in Mexico, was about all exhausted and no very good FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 359 results obtained ; that there had been so much time and means wasted that he doubted if the authorities would pay any more attention to land purchases in Mexico, and if anything more was done that he believed it would be through private enterprise ; also said that, if he had the money, he would help me out in the matter, but hoped that I could go and enlist help from some of the brethren who were able to buy on their own responsibility. On receiving this word, I started immediately for Utah, came direct to Salt Lake City and offered this land. The first answer I received was that my land was too dear; that I should not expect such a price when good lands could be obtained for one-fourth this amount. I was surprised at this ignorance of land matters in Mexico, for I knew all the lands offered for such low fig- ures were almost worthless, and I supposed this was now understood. The land I was offering would have been cheap at ten times the price, in comparison to any yet procured — even as a gift. Poor land means poor people, and expensive water added to cheap land means dear homes. I have often been puzzled to see how eager some people are to purchase acreage because the land was cheap, when the preparing of this land for homes would cost much more than good lands that could be obtained, where homes could be made easily and cheaply, and much better when made. I worked hard to get this land secured. Finally, I met with a party, at Ogden, who agreed to meet me in Chihuahua within the time and, if the land was as repre- sented, secure it. A day was set to meet. I hurried back to Chihuahua and got an outfit all ready for the trip, feeling safe, for I knew that the land would show for itself. 360 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. This party never came. I received a letter, giving some excuse, but saying they would come in a few days. Before the time proposed the bond was up, and the per- sons wanting the chance bought the land the day it was on the market. I then telegraphed to the parties that they need not come, as it was too late. , CHAPTER LIII. Other Brethren Visit my Proposed Purchase — Their Good Report — Death of my Son, Wiley — My Return to Salt Lake City — A new- Invention. 1NOW made up my mind to get the best understand- ing of various tracts of lands, then for sale. I suc- ceeded to my satisfaction. I wished, before leaving Mexico, to get some of our people to go with me and see the tract of land that I had been recommending, for many persons supposed that I had exaggerated its merits. I again visited Brother Snow's headquarters, hoping that I could get someone sent to see this land. I knew the parties who had purchased it, and had reason to believe that it could be bought of them still at a reason- able figure, considering its qualities. I succeeded in getting the brethren interested enough to let two of the Elders — Brother Spencer and Bishop Williams, two of the most reliable pioneers in camp — to go with me. We were gone fourteen days. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 36 1 On their return they reported that I had shown to them the best country they had ever seen — IlHnois and Ken- tucky not excepted ; also, the most hospitable and well- disposed people they had ever met. I now felt satisfied, as far as duty was concerned. This land was acknowledged to be much better than I reported it to be. I now left Mexico, with the feeling that I had done all I could at that time. I came to Salt Lake again and offered some other good lands that I had listed for sale ; but all faith in Mexican land matters seemed at an end. A great many persons, having visited and seen the country purchased, left in disgust, supposing there was none better. The only way to account for this good land being passed by is simply to use the old hackneyed expression, ''Wait; the time hasn't come yet." After stopping in Salt Lake City for a short time, I started for home, in Arizona; on my way home I called upon the gentleman who had bought the land. He knew all about my efforts to secure the property, and pledged himself to me that I should have the hand- ling of the property, should it ever be wanted. When I arrived at home I found my son Wiley very sick. From over-work and exposure he had become consumptive. I was advised to move him to a cooler climate. We fitted up to go. His desire was to move to Mexico. I felt like doing anything to please him, for he was good and faithful to me and in every respect a true man. He had been with me on some of my hardest mis- sions and was always faithful. He tried hard to get me to load him into a wagon and start, but I could see that 362 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. he was fast failing. After being confined but a few days to the house he gave up, saying, "Well, pa, I can't pull through; I will have to give it up. What shall I tell ma?" I never saw a more common-sense death than his was. This was a hard loss to me, for he was like a father to the children in my absence. Another son, 16 years of age, was now taken quite sick, seemingly almost the same. We were about fitted up for a move. I now determined to start for Utah. Death seemed to desire the lives of my family. Others were complaining. My sick son seemed uneasy and wanted to move, so we started out. After being on the road but three days, he died and was buried at the Vulture mining camp. My three oldest sons remained in Arizona, and are there yet. I would often find myself counting over my children to see how many I had left. Sometimes I felt almost bewildered. After leaving Vulture, five children, two grand children and myself traveled through alone, com- ing by the way of Scanlan's Ferry. We had no further trouble. After this Death seemed satisfied for the time being. We met travelers at different times along the road, sometimes a single wagon, never more than two or three. As grass and water are scarce in many places, large companies cannot travel as well as small parties. The country is now safe to travel on any of the routes through to Mexico. Ranches and settlements wherever it is possible to locate for water. We arrived in Fairview, Sanpete county, where my daughter, Mary, lived. We bought a home for the fam- ily. My daughter, Ella, having lost her husband, took FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 363 charge of the children when I came to Salt Lake City to start business at my old trade. This I found would be difficult to do, as the trade had somewhat changed, and it would take time and capital to get a start. So I con- cluded to start on a project I had had in my mind for a number of years. That was to invent a better side-sad- dle than any yet in use and make the same adjustable to different-sized riders. This I have finally accomplished, after hard work and much more delay than I expected when I commenced. I will now give what I have formerly promised — a short account of something I have learned about some of the Indian tribes I have visited. CHAPTER LIV. The Apache Indians — Ideas Concerning God — A Statement Concern- ing the Jesuits — Treachery of Kerker — Slaughter of the Apaches — The Navajoes — Colonel Chavez' Horse Race — Loss of Govern- ment Horses — War with this Tribe— The Yaqui Tribe — The Tarumaries — A Peculiar Custom. THIS chapter will be devoted to what I have seen and learned about Apaches and other southern tribes. The common supposition is that the Apaches are by nature and desire a blood-thirsty people, and have always been so. This is a mistake, but it is a fact that we have to go back almost a century to find them a peaceable people. • Their own story is that they were once vegetarians. They were so opposed to killing that they would say to 364 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. the bear, ''God made you; go in peace, I will not kill you." And to the birds, '*God made you with feathers to protect you in cold air, and wings to fly. How good God has been to you!" And even to the rattlesnake they would say, ''You have rattles and tell us where you are so that we can get out of your way. We will not kill you." I am giving this as the Apaches gave it to me. They believe in God the Father, and in a God Mother; and that God dwells in a place where He can see and understand what they do; that they once dwelt with Him, and that when they die if they have done good they will go back to dwell with their Father and Mother, but if unworthy they are sent away from them in sorrow. They pray in the evening that they may be protected from their enemies and have good dreams, desiring that their dead friends may visit and talk to them. They believe that they once had more power with God than they now have, and acknowledged that they had done wrong in killing their own people; saying that for that reason their prayers were not heard and answered as formerly. They say that Americans do not honor God, but throw His name at their mules and cattle the same as they do clods or rocks, and that it is their duty to destroy the wicked blasphemers from off the earth; that none have a right to live unless they honor their Father's name. They reckon that by killing white men at the ratio they have been that eventually they will exterminate the white race. This was their belief a few years since- Possibly they are beginning to think differently by this time. They say that the cause of their fighting with the Catholic Mexicans is that when Mexico was conquered FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 365 by the priests, they wanted the natives of Mexico to cease to worship the real Father God, and worship ^ods made of wood and stone. Most of the natives sub- mitted to this, but the Apaches refused and went into the mountains away from the priests. After a while the Indians that commenced to worship the wood and stone gods made war on them by order of the priests, and drove them to bloodshed. After a while they agreed to submit and made a treaty to listen to the priests, but they soon found they were bad men and had been enemies ever since. Now for a little history, partly written and partly traditionary. Some two hundred miles in a westerly direction from the city of Chihuahua, among the Sierra Madre mountains, there is a beautiful valley of about fifty thous- and acres of land, well watered and surrounded with timbered mountains. The Mexicans call this Paradise, or Garden of Eden. About eighty years ago the Jesuits planted a mis- sion among the Apaches in this beautiful valley. Every- thing went on happily for a season. The head priest had considerable influence with the natives, using his power for his own convenience. In connection with many other selfish customs, the priests required of the Indians one of their handsomest daughters to live at the mission, making them believe that there was some religious ceremony, essential to their welfare, that required the presence of this maiden. A daughter of the chief was selected. The priests had told the Indians that they lived pure lives before God. After a while the daughter of the chief was missing. When the Indians made inquiries for her, they were told 366 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. that she had been taken to heaven in a miraculous man- ner and was made a saint. The chief did not believe the story and suspected treachery. There was an old woman who had had charge of the Indian girl. The Apaches seized and tortured her until she confessed the truth. The priest had lived with the daughter as a wife. And when her condition became such as to betray him he had her killed and buried. The Indians found her body and confirmed this treachery. They then raised and killed all connected with the mission and destroyed every- thing possible. They swore vengeance on the priests and their followers and vowed that no Catholic should ever inhabit this valley. I have seen the ruins they made within the last few years, and heard this story from the Mexicans living within a day's travel from this valley. They all dread the Apaches to this day. No Mexican has ever dared to make a home there. From that time until the present the Apaches have been at war with the Mex- icans. When white men first went to the region where the Apaches roam, the Indians looked upon them as a differ- ent class of people and did not make war upon the few white traders they met on the road to the city of Chihua- hua, but they would go in and trade with merchant trains owned by Americans, and in no way molest them. This peaceful state of affairs was broken up in the year 1843. At that time the State of Chihuahua was having a hard time with the Apaches, and the govern- ment offered a large reward for their scalps, ranging from $100 to $150 per head. This offer got to the ears of Colonel Kerker, of Texas. He raised a company of Texans and went to FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 367 the city of Chihuahua, and contracted with the Governor for Apache scalps. The Colt revolver had recently been brought into use. This company of rangers carried these weapons concealed under their coats and went to Galliana, a town on the Rio Santa Maria, in the north-western part of Chihuahua, near the mountains where the Indians dwelt. This Kerker arranged to have the Apaches come to a feast prepared for them, agreeing to meet them unarmed, as friends. The Indians, believing these white men real friends, came in without suspicion, and, while partaking of the hospitality, the rangers commenced with their revolvers and killed over a hundred of them. The Indians could make no resistance, but were literally slaughtered. Kerker got his money, but lost the respect of all decent men. A few years after this I was in the Apache country. They were killing both whites and Mexicans at every opportunity. Thirty-five years after I was again in that country and it was still the same. For many years when a white man was killed by an Apache, the whites would remark, "There is another of Kerker's victims." I saw this same individual in 1849 in Santa Fe, when he was there for a few days. So indignant were the people at him that there was a strong talk of lynching him. Individually, I succeeded in making friends with most of these Apaches. I have talked with them, but they have no confidence in the Mexican or white man. The move made by Gen. Crook that at the time proved a success, namely, getting one band to fight another, finally ceased to work and the scouts enlisted for the last few years have done but little killing. By the 368 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. •whites these Apaches are considered the worst Indians on the continent. I have never heard an apology or excuse for their conduct by any one, so, Hke the old miner who attended a Methodist revival, when the preacher called on all who were for God to rise to their feet, all got up but the old miner. When all for the Devil were called to stand up the old miner arose. The parson asked him why he voted for Satan. The reply was that he never liked to see any man without a friend. THE NAVAJOES. A short sketch of this tribe may be interesting. They inhabit the country west of the settled portion of New Mexico. In 1847, when I first knew them, they were great thieves, but not much given to killing. Their philosophy was to spare the herders so that they could raise more stock. They were great sheep thieves, often taking whole herds, and sometimes taking the herders along. The Mexicans feared to follow them through the canyons, and when the Indians once reached the mountains they were generally let alone. After the U. S. government was extended and New Mexico became a territory, the U. S. forces commenced to try to stop these raids and, after many years, partially succeeded, and troops were stationed in the Navajo country. There was a batallion of Mexican volunteers, cavalry, under Col. Chavez, stationed at one of the out- posts. The Indians were seemingly subdued. They were always considered smart and somewhat politic, as well as thrifty and industrious, so they soon accepted the situation. When they found the U. S. government was determined FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 369 to make them behave, they made a treaty and agreed to quit steaHng and allow these troops to be stationed in their country and live in peace. This Colonel Chavez was a great gambler and horse racer. The Navajoes were fond of racing also. The colonel had a fine horse that he considered a ''world beater." A race was gotten up with the Indians, who were willing to bet anything on their horse. So sure was Colonel Chavez of winning that he bet some five hundred head of government horses, against the same number of Indian ponies. The Indians looked upon the colonel as owner of these horses. When the race came off, the Indians won. The Colonel was in a scrape. He refused to give up the horses, so the Indians took them. .^ I don't remember whether a fight ensued immedi- ately, or not, but I believe there did. At any rate the report was circulated that the Indians had declared war, and had run off all the soldier's horses. A war of extermination was declared against these Indians, and troops were sent into their country. Their ranches, farms, and stock were destroyed, and many of them were killed. The remainder were stripped of everything. They were taken prisoners and put upon a reservation in the eastern portion of New Mexico* Here they remained in poverty for some years. I do not know whether the facts were ever known by the government or not, but I beleive they were. After a time the Indians were allowed to go back to their old country, a reservation set apart for them and some stock was given them to make a start. Being indus- trious and thrifty, they soon began to pick up. They made blankets and traded them for ponies. Many of them about the years 187475 came into 23 370 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. the Mormon settlements, some few carrying enough blankets on their backs to buy a mare pony. An Indian that could load a little Mexican donkey with blankets was considered a good trader. It was not many years until these Navajoes had large bands of horses and sheep. They are again quite rich and prosperous. YAQUIS. A few words about the Yaquis might be interesting also. They inhabit the Rio Yaqui in Sonoro. They are an agricultural people and were occupying this same country at the time of the Conquest and were peaceable and quite numerous. After the government under Spain was well estab- lished they offered to make a grant of the Yaqui country to the inhabitants. The Indians declined the offer, say- ing the country was and always had been theirs and that they did not ask it to be granted to them. This was rather an insult to the arrogant Spaniard. The offer has been repeated from time to time, but the Indians have always declined the grant on the same old grounds. So the Yaqui country stands on the maps of Mexico as government lands. Efforts have been made several times to oust these Indians from their lands. Grants have been given from time to time as was the Brannan grant, but the Indians have never given up their idea of prior rights. There are a great many of the best citizens of Mex- ico in sympathy with the Yaquis. TARUMARIES. This tribe inhabits the mountain country in the western part of the state of Chihuahua. There are many FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 37 1 villages situated in the Sierra Madre mountains, accessible only by very difficult pack-trails. At the time of the conquest these people occupied, not only these mountain villages, but many of the fertile valleys along the foothills. Many of the present towns of western Chihuahua bear the old Indian names and are inhabited by people descended from the ancient inhabitants. With a little foreign mixture, the pure bloods greatly predominate. In many of these towns there are bands of these people who keep up their old customs, name, and lan- guage, but are recognized as citizens. They submitted to Catholicism in form, but of late years have almost entirely lost respect for the padres \ saying that they cared more for their coppers than they did for their souls. These people, both natives and mixed are very hos- pitable and industrious, and are more honest and virtuous than are the average Mexican. The villagers of the mountains are peculiar They seem to have a dread of mixing or associating much with anyone, even the Mexicans whose neighbors they are. It is their habit, when anyone approaches their village, for all the inhabitants to leave their houses and retire a short ways, leaving their doors open and everything exposed so that if anything is wanted by the travelers they can help themselves. But one thing must always be done. The pay for the article taken must be left in sight or without grace the party taking ever so small an article without pay, will be waylaid and will be very lucky if he escapes with his life. So positive are these rules that no one dare take the risk, and the people have commanded the utmost respect for ages by all who pass through their country. Unless imposed upon and insulted they molest no one. 372 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. These mountain Indians are excellent hunters. Deer, turkey and bear are plentiful in the mountains. They often go into the city of Chihuahua to trade. They pack most of their trade on their backs, traveling in single file, paying no attention to anyone except to do their trading and go straight back home. Some years since, at the town of Santa Rosa, these Indians, while on a trading trip, were insulted and abused by the inhabitants. The Indians went home, gathered some four hundred armed men, marched back through a number of settlements, attacked the place and almost exterminated the people, then went home satisfied. They were never called to account for the act. An account of the affair has been given to me seve- ral times by different Mexicans, who invariably tell it in honor of the charcter of these Tarumaries. CHAPTER LV. Letter to the Deseret News — A brief Review of Mexican History — Characteristics of the People — Land Grants and Purchases — Peculiarities of Land Titles — The Climate of Mexico. T HIS old letter, copied from the Deseret News, I think will help in describing Mexico : ''El Paso, State of Chihuahua, February loth, 1876. ''Brother y. Nicholson: "I herewith send you an account of the country and people of this region. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 373 DESCRIPTION OF EL PASO. •'The town of El Paso is situated on the right bank of the Rio Grande del Norte, in the State of Chihuahua, on a low bottom, liable to much damage from high water; land sandy. The streets are simply old cattle tracks, running in every direction. If an idea can be given of them without mapping it will be by saying they followed the forks of the trails, giving the grounds some- what the appearance or shape of irregular triangles. "The river-bed being quick-sand, it costs a great deal to keep a water-ditch in order. The houses are one story, made of adobe ; solid block, mainly after the old Moorish style of small fortresses ; hollow, square in cen- ter ; one door in front. CLIMATE AND PRODUCTS. •'The climate is warm and pleasant; plowing and sowing can be done any time during the winter. This makes the farmer rather indolent, as he does not have to hurry as ours of the colder climates do. "The products are wheat, corn, barley, beans, peas, onions, pepper, sweet potatoes and some few other vege- tables. Many things more might be profitably cultivated, if once understood; but the people are satisfied with what they have, and manifest but little interest in new introductions. "The fruits are grapes, in great abundance and of the best quality ; pears, which the people dry in great abundance, price, ten cents per pound. They are excel- lent eating. Their apples are small seedlings, not worth eating. A few peaches of an excellent kind do well here. I have seen no other fruits. I have heard that strawberries and some other small fruits have been culti- vated by foreigners, and they do extremely well. 374 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. RUDE AGRICULTURE. ''The mode of cultivation is with an old wooden plow, working their cattle by the horns. They scratch up the ground very poorly, afterwards doing much work with the hoe ; they regulate their ground for watering by making small embankments around small, irregular plats, from thirty to fifty feet across, and flooding the land. I think this a poor way, as it causes their land to bake very hard ; but this is the manner in which their fathers did it, so they think it is all right. They cultivate all open crops with the hoe, using the large, old-fashioned 'nigger' hoe. They cut their hay with the same tool. In Arizona we saw hundreds of tons, at the government posts, cut in this same way. They harvest with reap hooks and thresh with goats or flails. MECHANICS, DOCTORS AND LAWYERS. "Mechanics are scarce. In this town of ten thous- and inhabitants there is one blacksmith shop, three or four carpenter shops, two tailors, three or four shoe shops, one wheel-wright and one silversmith. And this is, as far as I have been able to learn, about the whole number. "To compensate for this lack of mechanics, there is but one doctor and one lawyer ; and the latter is sup- posed to be insane, as he has quit the practice, walks quietly around the town, says but little to anyone, is polite, dresses neatly and seems to mind his own busi- ness. My opinion is that he is the most sensible lawyer I have ever seen. LIMITED COMMERCE. "The commerce of the country is limited. The peo- ple sell their wines and dried fruits generally as soon as FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 375 ready. They go to all the surrounding country ; to Chi- huahua as well as up the country to Santa Fe and Ari- zona. There are three Jew stores and one Mexican store. Their business is small. "There are many small dealers of various kinds, and there are many people who seem to live on occa- sional small amounts ; but how they get their money deponent saith not. NON-PROGRESSIVE. " The people are slow to adopt improvements. Things look about the same as they did when I was here about thirty years ago, in '47. The town looks about the same. A very little has been done about the square and church — hardly perceivable. They use wooden- wheeled carts, and everything seems as though it was but a short time since I was here and saw things just as they now are. HOSPITALITY. " This is natural to the people of this country. A kinder-hearted people, naturally, I do not believe can be found. They are polite and mannerly — even the lowest of them. Their children are quiet and obedient, there being no 'hoodlums' here. Parents are affectionate to their children. Husbands are polite and affectionate. They have great reverence for Deity, their religion and old age. Get them once directed right and they will be the best people on earth. HEALTH AND MORALS. "The people are generally healthy, there being but little disease among them. There are a few Americans living here. 376 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. ''As to their morals, I believe the people of this town stand above par, compared with more civilized communities. The Apaches are the only people said to be strictly virtuous that I have met on this journey as yet, though it is generally admitted that the aborigines are much more virtuous than the mixed race of this country. ''Here the people are a mixture of the Spanish and native — the native blood predominating. Of the pure bloods there are only about two hundred remaining in this town. Catholicism prevails more here than in the interior, so I am informed by persons from the lower States of Mexico. There liberty of conscience is begin- ning to be more popular, and priestcraft is beginning to lose its power over many, but not enough for them to be popular as yet. STOCK. "The stock of the country is scarce and inferior. Horses, cattle and goats are tolerably plentiful. There are a few pigs and fo^vls. The circulating medium is corn, copper coin, greenbacks and a little silver. Dogs are in great abundance, noisy but seldom bite. LOCAL GOVERNMENT. "Taxes are light, except on work on dam and water-ditch. The municipal regulations seem good. They have a police force, but it is seldom needed. The officer, the Jefe Politico, seems to control. There are some more officers, such as police magistrates, etc. ; but the first seems to be manager of everything of a politi- cal nature. The present incumbent, Pablo Padio, is serving his second term, having been re-elected lately. He is very much of a gentleman. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 377 ''The people are very obedient to official authority, and show great respect to the same. VARIOUS. ''With all the faults of the people — which faults are more blamable to the manner in which they have been ruled than to the people — there are good and noble principles among them. Their devotion to their religion I consider a virtue, for they have had no chance to have any better. Their reverence is unbounded, and, as I before stated, let them once be enlightened with the gospel and I believe they will receive the truth — and they will not fall away, but will stick to the right. "D. W. Jones. Mexico, although a sister republic, with railroad communications and much commercial intercourse with the United States, is not well understood by the average American. There has been for a long time, and still is, to quite an extent a prejudice against the Mexican peo- ple by the Americans. We look upon them as far behind the people of the United States, and often make unfair remarks about the "stupid" Mexicans, not stop- ping to consider who the people are or what their oppor- tunities have been. A great many accuse the Roman Catholic church of being responsible for the ignorance and degradation of the inhabitants. In as few words as possible, I will offer an apology for the Mexican nation, and compare what we have done with the same element. When this continent was first discovered there were millions of Indians inhabiting it, extending from the Atlantic to the Pacific, and from the north sea to the 2^"]^ FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. Gulf of Mexico. That portion of the continent lying west on a line from Texas to Oregon, fell under the control of Spain, a Catholic government ; that east under Protestant Christianity. Up to the treaty with Mexico, nearly two- thirds of this continent was under Spanish rule. Let us see what the conditions of the country were at that time. There were about six millions of the inhabitants of Mexico, enjoying all the rights of citinzenship. A great portion of the rulers of the country being of the natives, no distinction was made, but the priests offered to the natives the inducement of equal rights with the invaders. Mexico is simply a nation of converted semi-civil- ized aborigines, living and having a being, and still numbering as many as at first. The power and influence of the priests were extended into Arizona, New Mexico and California and thousands of Indians were brought into peaceable relations. No wars of extermination were declared against the natives, but missions of peace were the main means of conquest. Up to the year 1848 there were in this Mexican territory, tens of thousands living, and at least enjoying an exis- tence. Now let us see what has been done by Protestant Christianity for the natives who dwelt on their side of the line. I do not propose to quote hundreds of pages of history to show, but will simply refer to the fact. They have been killed off just as have been the bear, the wolf and the wild animals detrimental to the interests of the good, pious Puritans who wanted the country. The real and true comparison is, How do the natives of Mexico compare with those of the United States? Let that power and influence which took hold of the natives of Mexico speak and say to those who took FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 379 hold of the other side: "Here is our work. Mexico as it is today is peopled mainly by descendants of the races we found here. Now show us your work." The question is which are the greater people, Americans or Mexicans? The question should be, which are the greatest the Mexican or American Indians? If Mexico continues to improve and the people to advance in the future as they have for a few years past, the question may yet become, which people are the most advanced ? The Mexicans have many national characteristics that might be copied to advantage by Americans. Whether national contact will destroy some of these nobler qualities or not is a question. They are hospitable, polite, faithful to a trust, true to their friends, respectful to their superiors and parents. When they have the means they are ambitious to make home and everything around pleasant; and of late years are ambitious to advance and educate the people. They are tolerant to all religious denominations. Many suppose that priests still reign in Mexico. The Catholic priest who has helped to preserve the life of a nation has no more privileges in Mexico today than the Protestant minister who has helped to exterminate the natives on his domain. In many respects Mexico is far behind other civilized countries. Their system of giving out their lands in large grants has left the country in many places com- paratively unsettled. It is no uncommon thing for one man to own from a hundred thousand to a million acres of land. In fact, on the very start, all valuable lands not given as municipal grants were given to individual favor- ites. So there is no such conditions as in our country, where a poor man can go and locate a homestead. 380 FORTY YEARS AMO^fG THE INDIANS. Many persons have been deceived by the offers of government lands in Mexico, supposing they could get good lands at a nominal sum. The only way to get good lands is to purchase from the owners of undisputed tracts. To do this safely the buyer or agent must be perfectly familiar with the language, also the customs and character of the people he is dealing with. There are sharpers, speculators and deceivers in that country as well as in ours. Many of the officers of the government are inter- ested in speculations in lands and will vouch for persons when their recommend is interested. In getting titles they must be thoroughly and cor- rectly traced back to the original grant, and all adverse claims settled. From what I know of land troubles in Mexico, I would not spend much money on any land that had ever been in dispute. There are so many chances for deception that it is risky. There are many tracts of land where the titles run smoothly back to the origin where there never has been dispute or litigation. These are the lands to look for if one wishes to live in peace and security. When the grants were first allowed many times the boundaries were indefinite, the boundaries having been defined by mountains or streams, or something subject to dispute, the country not being fully explored. Those taking pos- session would set their monuments so as to take in all the country that would be considered valuable without particularly consulting the exact lines of the recorded grant. After ages of occupation these monuments come to be considered proper. Sometimes they were short, some- times extended beyond the lawful lines. There was often a great deal of waste land adjoining these grants. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 38 1 As Mexico is a dry country, no lands are of value except where water can be procured. As the country began to be prospected by foreign- ers desirous of stock ranches, etc., and also the more advanced condition of the government, it became appar- ent that these grants should be more perfectly defined, so that what land still remained to the government could be sold. As these old grants stood there was no cer- tainty even to a government title, as the grant could not be broken or infringed upon. The attempt to get these government lands and the failure to get titles has given rise to the idea that there are no good titles in Mexico. Whereas the titles of these grants are so good that they cannot be broken; and when there is any controversy between the government and land grants, the grants almost invariably win. Under the conditions it became necessary to cause a re-survey of the whole country. To bring this about the country was cut up into districts, and contracts let to persons to do the surveying, their compensation to be in part or whole or percentage of the lands left after the titled grants were defined. It now became a question between the old land owners and the surveyors which would get the most land. Where the surveyors could crowd in the lines they had the more land, while the grants sought at times to extend or reach the first allowance. This has given rise to much litigation, and even up to the present some few controversies are still going on. There is not much risk in buying old original grants that run regularly, without adverse claimants. In some few places there were small plats of good land secured to these surveyors by cutting off from the old grants. 382 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. This being adjoining to the waste land would be used as a bait to sell their worthless lands. This surveying business was conducted by corpora- tions composed of the most wealthy and influential men of the several districts. As the lands and lines became defined, they having the option from the government on all the land, took possession of these new portions, and commenced to advertise and offer millions of acres for sale at very low figures. Sometimes this surveying company would become owners of certain ranches. Many of the incorporators being land owners would arrange with the surveying company to add acreage from the worthless lands and on the reputation of the old ranch sell the whole tract. To explain this I will instance one case that came under my own observation and was offered here in Utah. Without naming the ranch I will call it C — . What is commonly known as the Rancho de C — . When enquiry is made regarding it the common answer from the people is that C — is a fine place, good land with plenty of water — a splendid place. This means five thousand acres of good bottom land along the Rio C — , and that is all the Mexican ranchers mean when he speaks of the ranch. The old grant probably embraces two hundred thousand acres extending out from the water about as far as stock would travel from water. There is but very little water except in the river. This ranch is bounded on three sides by dry deserts and one side by mountains with some timber. One attempt has been made to put this ranch, with five hundred thousand acres of worthless land added, upon the market on the reputation of the little fertile valley of five thousand acres of fine agricultural lands. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 383 These schemes are still gotten up from time to time, and the ignorant are imposed upon in Mexico just the same as in any other country; but when men get bitten in Mexico they try to excuse themselves by reporting that there is no safety in titles. Now all the answer that can be made to this is, Do business in Mexico just the same as you would in any other country. That is, determine what you want and then apply where it is to be had. Find good land with good tides, then secure it by purchasing from the owner. There are as good titles and protection in Mexico as in any country on earth, and men who have lived there for half a century will verify this. The climate of Mexico varies from very warm to temperate. All along the Rio del Norte and for some distance out the climate is warm. There is a mountain range running clear through from the north almost to the south coast. Much of the lands cultivated are high above the sea level. They are from four to seven thous- and feet. The mountain valleys and table lands are temperate. All who have visited the Republic of Mexico agree that the climate is among the best on earth. Many persons are incredulous when told that Mexico is not a hot country, referring to other countries not so far south being intensely hot. Many think the further south we go the hotter it becomes. The tempera- ture depends upon the altitude, and, as stated before, a great part of the habitable portion of Mexico being high the climate is simply delightful. Thousands of people live and cultivate successfully many of the higher valleys without irrigation. Still it is safe to have flowing water so that it can be used for irrigation when wanted. There are conflicting reports about Mexico and her 384 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. people, the same as there are about Utah. How often are we of Utah annoyed by the scribbling of some wiseacre who has spent a whole day in Salt Lake City, rode around and been stuffed by a Liberal hack driver, obtain- ing all the information needed, being thoroughly posted he writes up the country, people, customs, facilities, and explains what is needed, and advises legislation, etc., with all the assurance of one thoroughly posted. Some of our Elders who have made a flying visit to Mexico appear to me about as presumptuous. What they don't see or know would make a book. What they do see is often through a glass dimly. If one fast traveler of note happens to make a mistake in describing something all the rest copy. Like some smart idiot wrote years ago that the flowers of Mexico had no perfume; the birds no song. This has often been copied when there is not a word of truth in the statement. Neither is it true that the thorns of the Giant Cactus, Sahuara* are crooked like a fish hook. I simply mention these things to show that these hasty scribblers are not reliable on things of more importance. A person to know and understand Mexico and her people, as the Latter-day Saints should know and under- stand them, will have to go into the interior away from the commercial towns and cities. There are large districts of country inhabited by an almost pure race, descendants of Lehi. Any one conver- sant with the Book of Mormon will have no trouble in finding abundant proof that the greater portion of the inhabitants of Mexico are descendants of the Jews, and are the very people, or a great portion of them, to which the gospel is to go to immediately from the Gentile. That the work in Mexico seems a little slow is a fact, but no fault can be laid to the natives, according to my observation and experience in that country. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 385 When those whose duty it is to teach them are ready, according to the revelations given, the natives will receive them gladly. Now, as this country, Utah, is fast filling up with inhabitants that have and are coming to stay, there nat- urally will be an element that will push on from time to time. "Go west, young man," is now obsolete; there is no west to go to, so the pioneer must either turn to the northern plains of Canada or the mountain valleys of Mexico, or allow the heel of civilization to be placed upon his neck for all time. The questions arise, are there no more pioneers? Have they ceased to be — have we all found the haven of rest so long looked for? Are the waste places all built up? I cannot think that all progress is at an end, notwith- standing Salt Lake City is a great place. Still, I do not believe all will end here. So, in case there should be an individual or two who have the spirit of pioneering^ yet lin- gering within them, I will ask and answer a few questions for their benefit. In answering these questions I may repeat some things already explained in the book ; but for the convenience of many persons I have concluded to ask and answer just such questions as are put to me almost daily, doubtless, many times, by people who wish to gain information. While some ask questions merely to be sociable, my aim is to give those who are interested in the welfare of the people of Mexico and might wish to go to that country, such information as will be of use and protect them from being misled. The most important consideration is good lands with perfect titles. So to begin : Can good lands be procured in Mexico? Yes; as good as can be in Utah or any country I have ever seen. Are the titles good? Yes; there are many large 2,S6 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. tracts of good land, suitable for colonizing upon, that the titles originated in Spanish grants. These grants are proven to be perfect, as they stand good under all tests. How about government titles? It is the report that a Mexican title for land is not very reliable. How does this report come about? There is no reason why a title from the present government of Mexico is not good. The only thing necessary is to get your location right. People of this country often make mistakes in locating properties. No government will defend a person on lands belonging to another party simply because they would like to have it, and make a wrong location. Can a person settle upon and procure lands in Mexico the same as in the United States? No; there are no such laws in Mexico. In fact, at the present time, that Republic has no lands to be considered. This I have fully shown heretofore ; your question must apply to titled properties. It is a waste of time to ask ques- tions about government lands in Mexico. Then you say all desirable lands must be bought of private owners ? Yes. What price will have to be paid for these lands? About the same average as public lands in this country. How is that? I have often heard that good lands could be bought in Mexico for twenty-five cents per acre, either from the government or from land companies, who have control of large tracts. Well, my friend, if you depend upon any such pro- spects you will be left, as others have been who have undertaken to get cheap lands in that country. How is the country you recommend for timber? Is there plenty, and of what kinds ? Pine, of the best qua- lity, is in great abundance, as well as considerable oak and some other hard woods of medium quality. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. T,Sy Is the timber in the mountains and canyons, the same as here in Utah? No; there are millions of acres of timber lands adjoining the tillable valleys that the timber grows upon, the low hills and upland plateaus, where teams can drive among the timber without any road making whatever. Then there must be considerable rain fall in this timbered country? Yes; there are thousands of inhab- itants living in the district who never pretend to irrigate their lands, and they raise good crops, generally. Do they never fail of crops? Yes, sometimes; they reckon an average of every seven years for drouth. Would it not be safer to get land where there is water for irrigation, in case it should be needed ? Yes ; I would not buy land at any price in Mexico unless there was a reasonable amount of water belonging to the land. Then you do not like to depend upon the rains entirely ? No ; and for good reason. We have found, by experience here in Utah, that irrigation is handy and profitable. A great variety of products can be raised, as we can apply the water when needed. When we depend upon rain, many times the seasons are so divided that we have the extremes of wet and dry. This is com- mon in the district of Mexico that I recommend for set- tling. When is the rainy season in that country? June, July and August are the rainy months ; during the win- ter season there is considerable rain and some snow. Oh, I thought it was an awful hot country. How is it you have snow when it is so far south? Mr. Jones, you must be mistaken. I have been down in Arizona; it is very hot there — too hot for me — and this Mexican country is a long ways further south, and you say you 388 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. have snow there. My friend, you must study the geogra- phy of Mexico a little. If you will look upon the map of Mexico and find the State of Chihuahua you will observe a district of country showing where several streams head and run off in different direc- tions, some running for hundreds of miles north ; so you see, on entering the State of Chihuahua on the north one travels up-hill for several days. The facts are that some of the finest and most fertile mount- ain valleys of that country are, as shown by meas- urement, two thousand feet higher than Salt Lake val- ley. So, if Zion is to be built up in the tops of the mountains, we lack two thousand feet of being there yet. Then you mean to say the climate is temperate? Yes; the altitude preserves us from the heat. While being so far south, the winters are moderate ; all who have ever lived in the district admit that it has a fine climate. What are the products? Corn, beans, potatoes, melons, cabbage, onions and anything common to a tem- perate climate, and good, mellow soil is or can be raised. How about fruits — is there much raised there? While it is one of the best fruit countries possible, judg- ing from what I have seen, there is but little progress yet by the natives, as fruit raisers. Why is this? Simply this like in most everything else — the people are a long way behind. They know nothing about grafting or budding fruits ; they plant the seeds and let them grow often in clusters, and take what comes. I have seen some of the finest seedling apples that were ever produced, picked from trees grown in a thick clump, without any cultivation whatever. Also pears, apricots, plums and .such hardy fruits common to a temperate climate. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 389 How about grapes? It is too cold for any except the hardy varieties. Is it a good wheat country? Yes; wheat does quite well, except when the season is wet. About harvest time, when, like all rainy countries, the harvest is attend- ed with difficulties, sometimes the wheat is damaged by rust. This can be hindered, somewhat, by drilling the wheat, giving it a chance to ripen early, and not so apt to be effected by damp weather, as thickly sown wheat. Rye, oats and barley do well. How is the range? Splendid; the whole country is thickly set with excellent grass. Then if it is a thickly timbered county with plenty of grass there must be plenty of game? Yes ; there are deer, bear and wild turkeys in great abundance. A person fond of hunting can have all the sport he wants. There are springs of pure water and beauti- ful mountain streams all through the country, so that game has a fine chance to live and grow fat. Then there must be fish in these mountain streams? No; for some cause these streams are not stocked with fish of much worth. Is the country thickly inhabited? Are there towns and settlements where business could be opened up? If the country was thickly settled there would be no room for colonizers. There are several towns num- bering from one to five thousand inhabitants within a reasonable distance. There are also some of the richest mining camps of Mexico in the district of country, that would furnish an excellent market for all products raised. What are the facilities for different kind of manufactures or industries? Stock raising, especially fine horses, as the high altitude and solid surface, healthy atmosphere and pure water would be adapted to breeding a superior class of thoroughbreds. Now I am astonished to hear 390 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. you recommend the raising of fine horses in Mexico. That revolutionary country where they will take every- thing a man owns and give him nothing in return. What would you do to protect your fine stock? Now to answer this I will make the statement as given to me by many of the old settlers of the district I am writing about. That is, no revolutions or wars of a national character have reached that district for over a hundred years except to defend themselves against the Apaches. The district is known as the Warrior district, but their warriors are for their own defence and protection; they are noted for minding their own business, being peaceable when let alone, but very ugly when interfered with; perfectly honest and united in protecting themselves against thieves. It is naturally one of the best protected countries on this continent, and a reasonable sized colony could and would be as safe there as any place upon earth. Would cattle raising pay? That is one of the principal businesses of the country. Cattle are bought annually and driven from that country to the United States. Is it a good sheep country? Yes; naturally so, but if I could have my way the immediate district, if colonized, would be protected from sheep depredations. If there is a people on earth who deserve the name of pirates I think it is the average sheep owner of Utah. They know no law but to crowd their sheep upon any and every place where they can live regardless of the rights of others. There are large districts of country in northern Mexico well adapted to sheep raising, not suitable for farming or inhabiting to any great extent. Sheep men should be satisfied with such countries and not crowd themselves upon the setders as they do in this country^ FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 39 1 eating off the range from the home stock, befouHng the waters and filling the atmosphere with a sickly stench for the greater portion of the summer season. The answer to this is that it is for revenue. Yes revenue, but at the cost of the comfort, health and lives of many people. The revenue is to the few while the nuisance is to the many. Anyone wanting a sheep ranch in Mexico had better not apply to me for information. I would rather wear a coat made of Australian wool than have a healthy, happy country tramped down and made a sickly, stinking desert by herding sheep around a settlement. But if anyone should wish to start a woolen factory they would have no trouble in getting all the wool wanted, for it is already cheap and plentiful. Would a tannery pay ? Yes; hides and oak bark are plentiful, that really would be one of the most profit- able industries and easiest to start. Lumber and all kinds of building materials being near at hand. Is there a demand for mechanical labor? My sup- position is that a thrifty colony would demand work among themselves. Again, the country being new as far as modern improvements are concerned would, when an example was set, naturally begin to build up and create a demand for many kinds of labor that are not now wanted among the natives. It is a country naturally rich in resources, and would soon prosper and build up a people provided they applied themselves intelligently and industriously to improve the natural privileges. How is the government? Do you think a man can live there in peace any length of time? I think a man will have all the privilege and protection that could be reasonably desired. Well, now, why won't they legislate against our 392 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIA. .S. religion in time there just the same as is being done here? That is too big a question to be answered in a sentence. You must read the Book of Mormon in true belief, realizing that it is true and plain. If you will do this honestly you will have no fears about the future in Mexico. Well, now, how can a person be protected in his rights? By going slow and learning how from some one who is capable of teaching you. Can a person single-handed do anything in the country you recommend? No, sir; it will not amount to anything except a colony of sufficient strength and means to get a good tract of land and be for a season self-sustaining. Would it not be very expensive to move into that country? Not under proper system and organization. How long would it take to go from here with a family and get settled to work? About fifteen days, allowing nothing for delays. How far is it from the railroad? About one hund- red and fifty miles to the district. Can the necessary stock be procured to commence with? Yes, and quite reasonable. How about provisions? Such as corn, beans and meat are in abundance. Flour is scarce and of a poor quality and cannot be obtained until mills are built as the natives have no good mills, the flour is bad, but the corn is excellent and will make good meal, which will answer for a season. Well, Mr. Jones, I have sold out to a Liberal here for fifty thousand, and I don't much like the idea of going without my cake and biscuit. Ain't there no way to get good flour? Oh yes, you can get it for about nine dollars per hundred. FG[ITY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 393 That will do; if I go I will take a few sacks. How about custom duties? No trouble for regular colonizers that go in order and conform to the laws and make their applications beforehand, so that when they arrive at the custom house they are known as colonizers, haphazzard work in Mexico makes trouble the same as in any other country. Do you think there will be much of a move from this country to Mexico? I did think so at one time; but I am now under the impression that there will be no great move to that land. What has changed your opinion ? Simply this — the people do not wish to go. The inhabitants of Utah have good homes and have made up their minds to accept the situation and stay, and enjoy their wealth and luxuries the same as other people. Then you have given up the idea of ever seeing a prosperous colony of Mormons settle in Mexico, in some of the rich valleys that you have been recommend- ing so long? No, sir; not at all. I still have faith in the move ; those who have faith in the Book of Mormon, and have a greater desire to see the words of the Book fulfilled that to have to accumulate wealth, will go. Then you think it will be at the sacrifice of worldly wealth and comforts that people will take hold of the work? Seemingly so, but not in reality. There are many principles revealed to this people that we are slow to put in full practice. Among others United Order, 'a principle the Prophet Brigham declared would have to be practiced before further advancement would be made by this people. While the majority of the people called Latter-day Saints are inclined to look with suspicion on any move in that direction, the natives of Mexico favor and, in a good degree, practice the principle. A short 394 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. description of their mode of farming will illustrate this. In the spring, when planting time comes, all join together and go into the field of one party and plow and put in the seed ; the poor man who has no cattle shares the same as the wealthy. This they continue until all the fields of the village are planted. If any lack seed it is loaned to them. If there is a scarcity of provisions the first field products fit for use, instead of being sold at an exorbitant price, become common property, and all the hungry partake of the blessing. When the crops are gathered in the owner of the early field receives such as his neighbors feel free to give him, which is always liberal in quantity. Now, I would not advocate the doing just as these natives do ; but will say this, their customs show that they have a principle of union and good fellowship among them that could easily be trained into more suc- cessful principles of union. They are true Israelites, descendants of the Jews, and, having left Jerusalem before the crucifixion of the Savior, have not that curse resting upon them, but, on the contrary, have the merit of having descended from a people who received the Savior and the gospel and lived for hundreds of years in a condition of peace, union and intelligence far beyond the Church at Jerusalem. They are entided to the gos- pel, according to the Book of Mormon, immediately fol- lowing the work among the Gentiles. The day of their deliverance cannot be far away, for if the fullness of the Gentiles is not close at hand, the Saints must have a hard experience before them. Now, to finish up this work, I wish to give a few of my own observations and reflections. The sketches of history I have given as they occurred to me. My descrip- tions of country and inhabitants, according to the best of FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 395 my judgment, after years of study and acquaintance. No person can describe a country from a single visit suf- ficiently well to predicate a reliable report upon, unless receiving information from a most trust-worthy and intel- ligent source. For this reason I have always made it a rule to visit country, where convenient, at different times and seasons ; also to inquire from different disinterested parties, watching closely the general reports. The judge on his bench allows a person's general reputation to be a proper question for proof, but will not allow direct indi- vidual testimony, neither good nor bad. This rule should largely apply in determining the quality and con- ditions of a country. If the reputation is generally good, then we may look favorably on the subject; but if bad, like the person with a bad reputation, we should be care- ful in dealing with them. Sometimes, when speaking of certain tracts of land in Mexico, persons will ask me if the titles are good. When I tell them yes, they will ask, "How do you know? I hear people are often deceived about titles; how do you know they are good?" There was an old lady told me the title is good. Now this might seem a light answer; but, in reality, is not the "old lady's" answers on general reputation, and many times more reliable than an interested party? Of course, this information is preliminary; but it will, many times, enable a person to form an opinion as to whether it will pay to make further investigation. I would rather take the friendly report of a neighbor about the titles of a Mexican ranch than I would the information of an officer of state, that might have an ax to grind. People, who visit President Diaz and cabi- net when on land business in Mexico, are likely to be kindly treated and receive such information as his 39^ FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. Excellency and associates have to give, but, individu- ally, I have always found it best to get posted from the neighbors or owners. I came from Mexico to Utah nearly forty years ago. I have been interested in that country and people from that time until the present. I have often met Elders whose faith and testimony seemed strong, yet seemed to have but little faith or interest in the work among the remnants spoken of in the Book of Mormon. To me this has always seemed strange. We are all looking forward to the time soon coming when the gos- pel will be withdrawn from the Gentiles and go to the "Jews, of which the remnants are descendants," so says the Book of Doctrine and Covenants. There can be no question but the turning of the gospel from the Gentile to the Jew means first to the remnants. Any one studying the Book of Mormon care- fully cannot help but see that the Word is to be carried to the remnants. It might be easier and more conveni- ent to make a tour to Jerusalem, but it won't fill the bill. The remnants must be preached to, then they will believe and come to a knowledge of Jesus. We who have been gathered from the Gentile world have the promise of coming in and being numbered with the remnants and helping them to build up the New Jerusalem, provided we harden not our hearts. Now what does this hardening of hearts mean? I will suppose a character and see if it will apply. A person hears the gospel, his heart is pricked and naturally softened. The love of God and the testimony of Jesus comes upon him, he goes forth after receiving the blessings of the ordinances and preaches the gospel to his friends and countrymen and baptizes many, teaches them their duty, and finally gathers to Zion. FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 397 Then he settles down to the duties of home and life among the Saints. He is prospered and blessed, his heart is warm and soft. He enters into all the duties common to a faithful Elder, his family increases, he is persecuted for his belief and practice^ all this he stands and feels good in doing his duty and maintaining his principles. Now this man has been gathered out from the Gentiles and will have the privilege of being numbered with the remnants, if he hardens not his heart. Now why should such an individual harden his heart? What motive or cause could there possibly be for the harden- ing of the heart? It may come in this way, the Laman- ites are a poor, and to the rich and refined looked upon as a dirty, degraded people, still the Lord has promised that those of the Gentile world who receive the words of the Book should carry them to the remnants. Now will we do this, or will our riches hinder us when the time comes? Doubtless there will be some who will say, "I am not interested in these dirty Indians." Possibly this is what hardening of the heart means. Some would apply this to the whole world who reject the gospel. I think it more consistent to apply it to the Elder who has received the gospel and had his heart softened to his duty and then allows it to become hardened through prosperity. To those who suppose the Lamanites all low and degraded, I will add this to what I have already said in their favor. There are thousands of the finest artisans upon earth among the remnants. Also many of them are educated and refined, and as for natural intel- lect, who ever saw an Indian who was a dunce? Without the aid of the remnants this people never would amount to much. We have increased and built up beyond any other people, yet our numbers are small 39^ FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. considering the great work before us. Many will say wait, the time has not come to preach to the remnants. Possibly this is so in a measure, still I never could believe but what many of the people have been ready for some time past. The mission to labor among the remnants has never been a popular work. There are too many sacrifices to make. There is not an Elder who has labored faith- fully for the welfare of the Indians but what has been brought under trying ordeals, many times suffering worse than death. It is no wonder that but few have stuck to the work. There will, doubtless, be a change when a more general spirit of preaching to the remnants come over the Elders. Missions will be conducted in a more systematic manner. More wisdom will be given and support extended. I have seen this Church and people pass through many trials. They have always been able to stand and gain strength through their various experiences. The gospel teaches us that we should be ready to make any sacrifice for our religion ; but I have never been con- vinced that we have a right to sacrifice, in the least, any portion of our religion, either individually or as a people, for the sake of convenience. Our enemies, the wicked of the world, have been crowding upon us from the be- ginning, seeking to make us abandon the principles God has revealed, until now we are virtually denied the rights of citizenship unless we abandon our religion. The concessions we have lately made — whether it has done us any good or not— -has fully proven to God and man that there is no honesty in the propositions made ; no concession will satisfy our enemies short of down right apostasy. If this people would really become wicked FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. 399 and fully practice the abominations common to the pres- ent generation, then we could vote, hold office and be '•good citizens." To say that the practices of this people cannot be tolerated in the nation, as a religion, is to say that the teachings of the Bible cannot be allowed as religion — for there is not a principle taught or practiced as religion by this people except Bible doctrines and precepts. This the world knows and have acknowledged as often as our principles have been put to the test. Many look for- ward to some move of importance taking place within a year or two. Sometimes I am asked if I have an idea. Yes. ''Well, what is it?" I believe it will not be long before the Saints will acknowledge that the wisdom of man will not do to depend upon, and turn unto the Lord and ask Him, in sincerity, to direct them through His servants, whom He has commissioned to lead Israel. Politics will not do. There are powers that will beat us when we depend on our smartness. It may be a little humiliating to acknowledge, but the world are smarter, in some things, than we are. Young Utah will never do to lead this people. Whenever we undertake to get ahead, in any way, of the wisdom of our Elders, then we will fail to put a man forward as our best man, because of any earthly success will never do. History points to a time when our rulers in this na- tion were honest and wise. Laws were made for the good of the whole people. No speculative jobs were put up in those days ; both brains and principles were in demand. As the nation advanced wealth became princi- pal, until today there is but little said about the intelli- gence, honesty and capability of national leaders only as financiers, and telling of the luxury and extravagance of their wives and daughters. 400 FORTY YEARS AMONG THE INDIANS. This wave of luxurious desire has even reached to Salt Lake City, and made a little ripple here during our last grand campaign. If we will look back calmly we will remember that financial ability was the main cry. The Lord wil not change His laws and commandments to suit the proud and wealthy. Wealth leads in the world, but principles will lead this people ; wealth does not necessarily do away with principles, neither does wealth prove that principle exists. So the first great move before this people will be to fall into line and be governed fully and willingly by the principles of the gospel. The questions are often asked, how long will it be before the power of the wicked is broken? j^ow long will this people be annoyed and oppressed by their ene- mies? This I cannot answer; but I refer the reader to page 122 of the Book of Mormon, showing clearly that there is a certain work to be done before the wicked will be used up. Any one reflecting reasonably upon the great work will see that it will necessarily take time. Nothing can be done only in order ; God has promised to hasten His work, but He has not promised to violate His laws for our convenience. It must, of necessity take a few years of diligent labor from many of the Elders of the Church. For anyone to suppose that the wicked will be destroyed for our protection before the remnants are ministered to is not faith, but presumption. Biographies generally end with death, romances with marriage. I am not expecting to die for many years to come, as I am still strong and healthy. ^ , ' ^ n i ' J M